{"title":"$50 to $100","description":"\u003cp\u003eIn-stock finds between $50 and $100.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"moog-k100312-front-upper-suspension-ball-joint-for-jeep-wrangler","title":"MOOG K100312 Front Upper Suspension Ball Joint for Jeep Wrangler","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition: \u003c\/strong\u003eUsed good \u003cbr\u003e\u003cem\u003eUntested, Opened box, Lightly used\u003c\/em\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMOOG K100312 Front Upper Suspension Ball Joint for Jeep Wrangler\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCOMPATIBILITY – Fits 1994-2001 Dodge Ram 1500; 1994-1996 Dodge Ram 2500; 2018-2018 Jeep Wrangler JK; 1984-2001 Jeep Cherokee; 1986-1999 Jeep Cherokee; 1986-1992 Jeep Comanche; 1993-1998 Jeep Grand Cherokee; 1999-2004 Jeep Grand Cherokee; 1993-1993 Jeep Grand Wagoneer; 1984-1988 Jeep Wagoneer; 1989-1990 Jeep Wagoneer; 1987-1995 Jeep Wrangler; 1997-2006 Jeep Wrangler; 2007-2017 Jeep Wrangler; 1997-2006 Jeep TJ\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHardened ball stud made of OE equivalent or better materials to withstand higher loads Easy to install. \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConstruction and design validated by MOOG engineers Premium forged housing with increased cross section of up to 52% more material in key area Broad coverage for foreign and domestic applications Greaseable socket inhibits rust and wear by allowing new lubricant to flush debris\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Moog","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46621291872491,"sku":"LPNO290902661-1","price":65.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Untitled_design_62.png?v=1755064260"},{"product_id":"novaparts-4pcs-front-rear-lh-rh-side-air-suspension-headlight-level-height","title":"NOVAPARTS KD-677KIT 4Pcs Front Rear LH RH Side Air Suspension Headlight Level","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: A+\u003c\/strong\u003e — Open box. Grade A++, Like New, untested\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — open box, Grade A++, like new, untested. This listing is for a NOVAPARTS 4-piece front and rear left-hand and right-hand side air suspension headlight level height sensor kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep your vehicle's adaptive headlights and air suspension system working as designed with this complete NOVAPARTS sensor kit. The set covers all four corners of the vehicle — front left, front right, rear left, and rear right — so you can restore accurate ride-height sensing and automatic headlight leveling in a single purchase. The sensors feature robust plastic and metal construction with integrated linkage arms, connector plugs, and mounting hardware, exactly as shown in the photo of the actual unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach sensor monitors suspension travel and relays position data to the vehicle's control module. This information is used to keep headlight beams aimed correctly as the suspension compresses or extends, and to maintain proper air suspension ride height. Having all four sensors matched from the same product line helps ensure consistent calibration across the axles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese sensors arrive in open-box condition and have not been tested. Buyers should perform their own verification and fitment confirmation before installation. Please verify compatibility with your specific vehicle year, make, and model before purchasing. This product carries a California Proposition 65 warning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1x Front Left (LH) air suspension headlight level height sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1x Front Right (RH) air suspension headlight level height sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1x Rear Left (LH) air suspension headlight level height sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1x Rear Right (RH) air suspension headlight level height sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e NOVAPARTS\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Headlight Level \/ Height Sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of Sensors:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 (full set — front \u0026amp; rear, LH \u0026amp; RH)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCoverage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Front and rear, left and right side\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCalifornia Prop 65 Warning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open box, Grade A++, like new, untested\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"NOVAPARTS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46625539621099,"sku":"LPNO306258084","price":82.05,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/4a0b65e6-6e2c-4f9a-b295-416840180b79.jpg?v=1753251008"},{"product_id":"mas-ignition-coil-pack-ba31","title":"MAS Set of 5 Ignition Coil Pack Chevy Colorado Trailblazer Condition UF303","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: CONDITION\u003c\/strong\u003e — Condition.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eCondition. This listing is for a MAS set of 5 ignition coil packs compatible with Chevrolet Colorado, Chevrolet Trailblazer, GMC Canyon, and Hummer H3. The photo shows one representative coil from the set of five units included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMAS aftermarket ignition coil packs are engineered as direct-fit replacements for the coil-on-plug ignition systems found on compatible GM inline-5 and inline-6 platforms. Running at 12 V, each coil in this set is built to deliver reliable spark energy to keep your engine firing efficiently. Compatible equipment makes include Chevrolet, GMC, and Hummer, covering models such as the Colorado, Trailblazer, Canyon, and H3. Replacing a full set of coils at once is the recommended approach when diagnosing misfires, rough idle, or poor fuel economy, ensuring consistent ignition performance across all cylinders.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach coil features a robust black polymer boot and cap assembly with a brass-toned metal core visible in the photo — the hallmark construction of the coil-on-plug design used on these GM applications. The mounting flange and integrated spark plug boot allow for straightforward installation with standard hand tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCalifornia Prop 65 Warning:\u003c\/strong\u003e This product can expose you to chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive harm. For more information, visit www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003e5 × MAS ignition coil packs (one coil shown in photo)\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e MAS\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePart Type:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ignition Coil Pack\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuantity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Set of 5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoltage:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible Makes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Chevrolet, GMC, Hummer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible Models:\u003c\/strong\u003e Colorado, Trailblazer, Canyon, H3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReplaces:\u003c\/strong\u003e UF303 \/ C1395 (per comp market references)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCalifornia Prop 65:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Urban Supply Plus","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46629175197931,"sku":"6-23 \/ LPNO348731718","price":57.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/3d7f15c1-55d7-4c57-9030-ae328a07ba63.jpg?v=1753334192"},{"product_id":"mens-suits-slim-fit-3-piece-business-wedding-tuxedo-jacket-vest-pants-suit-set","title":"Lanshion Mens Slim Fit 3-Piece Suit Light Grey Jacket Vest Pants XL OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. pre-owned, lightly used\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — this item is pre-owned and lightly used. It has been previously worn and shows minor signs of use consistent with light wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStep up your formal game with this light grey slim fit 3-piece suit set. Designed for men who want a sharp, tailored silhouette without sacrificing versatility, this set is ready for weddings, business meetings, prom nights, or any formal occasion that calls for polished style. The clean solid light grey colourway keeps things classic and easy to coordinate with a wide variety of shirts, ties, and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe single-breasted jacket features a refined notch lapel and a one-button front closure — a modern, streamlined look that sits flattering on the slim fit frame. A single back vent keeps movement comfortable, and a decorative pocket square is included in the breast pocket for a finishing touch right out of the box. The matching vest layers seamlessly under the jacket for a complete three-piece look, and the flat-front trousers complete the ensemble with a clean, wrinkle-resistant drape that photographs beautifully.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlim fit suit jacket — light grey, single-breasted, one-button, notch lapel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatching vest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMatching flat-front trousers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Specs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSize:\u003c\/strong\u003e XL\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Slim Fit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Light Grey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePattern:\u003c\/strong\u003e Solid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of Pieces:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eJacket Style:\u003c\/strong\u003e Single Breasted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLapel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Notch Lapel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eButton Style:\u003c\/strong\u003e One Button\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVent:\u003c\/strong\u003e Single-Vented\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFront Type:\u003c\/strong\u003e Flat Front\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wedding, Business, Formal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDepartment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Men\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis suit set is pre-owned and lightly used. Expect minor wrinkles from storage — a quick press or steam will restore a crisp, ready-to-wear appearance. Please review all photos carefully before purchasing, as this is a secondhand item sold as-is.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lanshion","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645079736555,"sku":"B0D6YDQDWS","price":74.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71187648-8f3e-4311-a543-dd653ac5b602.jpg?v=1753765686"},{"product_id":"ksp-6x5-5-wheel-spacers-for-ram-1500-2019-2024-1-538mm-real-forged-hub","title":"KSP Performance 6×5.5-77.8-H1.5-FORGED-F76 KSP 6x5.5 1500 2019-2024 OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Very good condition see pics\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — very good condition, see pics.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePick up a set of KSP forged hub-centric wheel spacers built specifically for the 2019–2024 Ram 1500. These 1.5-inch (38mm) spacers push your wheels outward for a wider, more aggressive stance while keeping the hub-centric ring design that eliminates vibration and ensures a precise, wobble-free fit. KSP machines these from real forged aluminum — not cast — for superior strength and durability under demanding driving conditions. The black anodized finish visible in the photos resists corrosion and gives the spacers a clean, purposeful look behind your wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFits: 2019–2024 Ram 1500 (6-lug models)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBolt Pattern: 6x5.5 (6x139.7mm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStud Thread: 14x1.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOffset: 1.5 inch \/ 38mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter Bore: 77.8mm (hub-centric)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReal forged construction — stronger than cast alternatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHub-centric design centers the wheel precisely on the hub\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e6x5.5 bolt pattern matches Ram 1500 factory spec\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e38mm spacing widens track for improved stance and clearance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlack anodized finish for corrosion resistance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBranded KSP grade-10.9 studs included (visible in photo)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel spacer(s) as shown in photos — please confirm quantity from listing photos before purchase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKSP-branded lug hardware (studs visible on unit)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: KSP\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThickness: 1.5 in \/ 38mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBolt Pattern: 6x5.5 \/ 6x139.7mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThread Pitch: 14x1.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCenter Bore: 77.8mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Forged aluminum\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinish: Black anodized\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible Vehicle: 2019–2024 Ram 1500\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an open-box item in very good condition. Please review all provided photos carefully — what you see is what you get. A great opportunity to get a premium forged spacer at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"KSP PERFORMANCE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645109522667,"sku":"B083FD9Q3G","price":54.89,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/2f91907b-ca69-4022-af8a-b3842dae5211.jpg?v=1753766232"},{"product_id":"delphi-es10933-oxygen-sensor-1","title":"Delphi ES10933 Oxygen Sensor","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cmeta charset=\"utf-8\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003e\u003cem\u003eUntested, Appears to be New \u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-family: -apple-system, BlinkMacSystemFont, 'San Francisco', 'Segoe UI', Roboto, 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif; font-size: 0.875rem;\"\u003eDelphi ES10933 Oxygen Sensor\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDelphi planar technology covers older, conical design sensors; Smart design consolidates SKUs without using long wires\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDelphi is a global OE manufacturer for oxygen sensor and all oxygen sensors are built to Delphi's OE standards\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePatented protective sensor coating helps prevent debris\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValidated for all fuel types, including ethanol blends like E85; OE tested to 150,000 miles, plus 2,000 hours severe thermal testing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Delphi","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645112275179,"sku":"LPNO310187866","price":77.13,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/9e297e7f-c8e1-4d3c-92bb-1348b23ea2b3.jpg?v=1753766364"},{"product_id":"a-premium-electric-fuel-pump-module-assembly-with-pressure-sensor","title":"A-Premium Fuel Pump Module w\/ Pressure Sensor FG2169 OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Untested, Like New\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — this A-Premium Electric Fuel Pump Module Assembly arrives in like-new condition and has not been installed or tested by us.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Premium FG2169 is a complete drop-in fuel pump module assembly built to restore proper fuel delivery and accurate fuel-level reading to compatible Mitsubishi vehicles. The unit ships as a full module: pump, reservoir bucket, float arm with sending unit, pressure sensor, mounting flange with integrated O-ring seal, and all pre-wired electrical connectors — everything needed for a straightforward tank-out replacement. A-Premium engineers these assemblies to meet or exceed OEM specifications, so you get consistent fuel pressure, reliable start-up performance, and accurate gauge readings without the added cost of a dealership part.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis module is part number FG2169 and is compatible with the following vehicles:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMitsubishi Outlander 2010 — 2.4L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMitsubishi Outlander Sport 2011–2013 — 2.0L \u0026amp; 2.4L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMitsubishi Outlander Sport 2017–2024 — 2.0L \u0026amp; 2.4L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eAlways confirm the part number and engine displacement against your vehicle's build sheet before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 × A-Premium Electric Fuel Pump Module Assembly (FG2169)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated pressure sensor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFloat arm \/ fuel-level sending unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlange seal \/ O-ring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-wired electrical connectors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e A-Premium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePart Number:\u003c\/strong\u003e FG2169\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eASIN:\u003c\/strong\u003e B0DG5W12BH\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncludes Pressure Sensor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncludes Sending Unit \/ Float:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible Engine Sizes:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.0L, 2.4L\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible Makes \/ Models:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mitsubishi Outlander, Mitsubishi Outlander Sport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open Box — Untested, Like New\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCondition Details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis item is open box. The unit is in like-new physical condition with no signs of installation or wear visible. It has not been bench-tested by our team. Buyers should perform their own fitment verification and installation inspection. The item is not factory sealed but shows no damage, missing parts, or broken components.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"A-Premium","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645120041195,"sku":"B0DG5W12BH","price":64.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/154ec019-cd1d-445d-9814-807481f665bc.jpg?v=1753766654"},{"product_id":"nakuuly-timing-belt-kit-with-water-pump-compatible-with-2002-2010-toyota-tundra","title":"Nakuuly Timing Belt Kit with Water Pump Compatible with 2002-2010 Toyota Tundra","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition: \u003c\/strong\u003eOpen box\u003cbr\u003e\u003cem\u003eUntested, Like new\u003c\/em\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNakuuly Timing Belt Kit with Water Pump Compatible with 2002-2010 Toyota Tundra Sequoia Land Cruiser 4Runner Lexus SC430 GX470 LX470 LS430 GS430 4.3L 4.7L V8 Engine Replaces # TKT021 TCKWP298\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with: 1998-2000 Lexus GS400 4.0L, 2001-2007 Lexus GS430 4.3L, 2003-2009 Lexus GX470 4.7L, 1998-2000 Lexus LS400 4.0L, 1998-2007 Lexus LX470 4.7L, 1998-2000 Lexus SC400 4.0L, 2002-2009 Lexus SC430 4.3L, 2001-2006 Lexus LS430\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with: 2003-2009 Toyota 4Runner 4.7L, 1998-2007 Toyota Land Cruiser 4.7L, 2001-2009 Toyota Sequoia 4.7L, 2000-2009 Toyota Tundra 4.7L. Replaces Part: TCKWP298, TKT-021\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplacement Engine Timing Belt Kits with Water Pump: The product can reach the specific water pressure of the engine without increasing the engine load. The valve body design and the carbon-ceramic mechanical seal improve the strength and ensure leakage prevention\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuality: Strictly implement the OE parts manufacturing standards, and go through field testing to ensure that the products are durable and reliable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Nakuuly","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46645271199979,"sku":"7-7 \/ LPNO347281534","price":76.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/92a6db70-40f3-48dc-b7fe-f8fb286cfbf3.jpg?v=1753770477"},{"product_id":"wolverine-waterproof-boot-d63a","title":"Wolverine Men's I-90 Waterproof Soft-Toe 6\" Construction Boot, Brown, 13 X-Wide US","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open Box.\u003cbr\u003eUsed, Grade A-. Minor front scuffs. See photos.\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Wolverine Men's I-90 Waterproof Soft-Toe 6\" Construction Boot offers top-level durability and comfort. Built for daily challenges, it is ideal for anyone working long, tough shifts. Sized 13 X-Wide in brown, this boot fits wide feet and delivers lasting support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe boot is made with waterproof full-grain leather. This material keeps water out and gives a polished look. The boot uses a breathable waterproof membrane. It pairs with a moisture-wicking mesh lining. This combination keeps your feet dry from sweat and rain. The result is comfort, even when you are on the move all day long.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Wolverine I-90 uses powerful EPX® anti-fatigue technology. This advanced system includes a dual-density footbed that absorbs shock and cushions each step. The footbed saves, then returns energy to your feet. Long shifts feel a bit easier. You stay comfortable and supported, from morning to night. The midsole is made of advanced polyurethane. This adds more cushioning and less fatigue. The nylon shank provides solid support underfoot, so your steps stay steady on any surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe outsole is a high-abrasion TPU SR lug design. It resists wear and tear up to three times longer than standard outsoles. The grip is strong, giving you extra traction on slick or rough ground. You will find these boots especially helpful in construction zones, factories, and outdoor sites. Direct attach construction creates a strong link between the upper part and the sole. This bond boosts durability and helps the boot move with your foot, not against it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExtra touches matter with work boots. A padded collar and tongue offer ankle support and cushion. Metal speed hooks let you lace up quickly. Finger loops make pulling on your boots fast and easy. These features let you gear up in the morning with less hassle. Every detail is designed with the hard worker in mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Wolverine work boot is a smart investment for job sites and workshops. It can also serve you on landscaping projects and outdoor chores. The waterproof system protects your feet in all seasons. Anti-fatigue technology helps keep your energy up. The rugged build means these boots will last, even if used daily.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWolverine’s I-90 boot stands apart for its comfort and protection. It is also versatile. You can wear these boots in construction, manufacturing, or maintenance roles. Many professionals trust Wolverine, and its technology makes workdays easier. The brown color gives them a classic look. You can wear them with different uniforms or work setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want to learn more about the Wolverine I-90 Waterproof Soft-Toe 6\" Construction Boot, see the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.wolverine.com\/US\/en\/i-90-epx-boot\/30789M.html\"\u003eofficial manufacturer’s page\u003c\/a\u003e for more details on features and specs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExplore more footwear and apparel that support your work needs: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eVisit our apparel collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What materials make up the Wolverine Men's I-90 Boot?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The upper is quality full-grain leather, which blocks water and holds up against scuffs. Inside, a waterproof membrane and mesh lining work together to keep sweat and water out, providing a healthier foot environment. The footbed uses dual-density polyurethane, built for shock absorption and energy return, making long days much easier to handle. Underfoot, the outsole is high-abrasion TPU. It grips slippery floors and rough terrain. The nylon shank inside the boot adds strength and stability, which can help prevent injury when walking on uneven ground.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the EPX® anti-fatigue technology benefit daily wear?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wolverine’s EPX® anti-fatigue system is a major upgrade. It uses a unique footbed with dual densities. This design absorbs the force of each step, returns energy, and reduces pain in the feet and legs. The cushion is soft yet durable, so it lasts for months without losing shape. Fatigue becomes less of an issue over long shifts. This helps you feel more comfortable and less tired, even when you’re always on your feet. It is great for busy job sites where you need every bit of support you can get.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these boots good for use in wet or slippery areas?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, these boots excel in wet and slick environments. The waterproof membrane blocks water from entering the boot. The lining inside wicks sweat and keeps your socks dry. The outsole is slip-resistant. It also gives a sturdy grip on surfaces like tile, metal, or mud. This means safer footing and less risk of falling. Whether working outside in the rain or inside on greasy floors, these boots help keep you safe and dry.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I clean and care for these Wolverine I-90 boots?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To keep your leather boots in top shape, clean off dirt with a damp cloth after use. Dry the boots at room temperature and never near heat. Use leather conditioner regularly, following the product instructions, to keep the leather from cracking. For the inside, remove the footbed to air out and reduce odor. Always check laces and hooks to ensure they stay secure.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What makes these boots a good choice compared to other brands?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Wolverine I-90 stands out with its combination of waterproofing, anti-fatigue cushioning, and tough construction. Many boots claim to offer similar features, but Wolverine EPX® technology is proven to help with fatigue. The TPU outsole is very resistant to wear, which helps them last longer. The fit is reliable and comfortable, especially in wide sizes. These features give you dependable boots for the price.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What materials make up the Wolverine Men's I-90 Boot?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The upper is quality full-grain leather, which blocks water and holds up against scuffs. Inside, a waterproof membrane and mesh lining work together to keep sweat and water out, providing a healthier foot environment. The footbed uses dual-density polyurethane, built for shock absorption and energy return, making long days much easier to handle. Underfoot, the outsole is high-abrasion TPU. It grips slippery floors and rough terrain. The nylon shank inside the boot adds strength and stability, which can help prevent injury when walking on uneven ground.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the EPX® anti-fatigue technology benefit daily wear?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Wolverine’s EPX® anti-fatigue system is a major upgrade. It uses a unique footbed with dual densities. This design absorbs the force of each step, returns energy, and reduces pain in the feet and legs. The cushion is soft yet durable, so it lasts for months without losing shape. Fatigue becomes less of an issue over long shifts. This helps you feel more comfortable and less tired, even when you’re always on your feet. It is great for busy job sites where you need every bit of support you can get.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these boots good for use in wet or slippery areas?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, these boots excel in wet and slick environments. The waterproof membrane blocks water from entering the boot. The lining inside wicks sweat and keeps your socks dry. The outsole is slip-resistant. It also gives a sturdy grip on surfaces like tile, metal, or mud. This means safer footing and less risk of falling. Whether working outside in the rain or inside on greasy floors, these boots help keep you safe and dry.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I clean and care for these Wolverine I-90 boots?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To keep your leather boots in top shape, clean off dirt with a damp cloth after use. Dry the boots at room temperature and never near heat. Use leather conditioner regularly, following the product instructions, to keep the leather from cracking. For the inside, remove the footbed to air out and reduce odor. Always check laces and hooks to ensure they stay secure.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes these boots a good choice compared to other brands?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Wolverine I-90 stands out with its combination of waterproofing, anti-fatigue cushioning, and tough construction. Many boots claim to offer similar features, but Wolverine EPX® technology is proven to help with fatigue. The TPU outsole is very resistant to wear, which helps them last longer. The fit is reliable and comfortable, especially in wide sizes. These features give you dependable boots for the price.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Wolverine Men's I-90 Waterproof Soft-Toe 6\" Construction Boot is designed for toughness, comfort, and safety. It stands up to demanding work conditions and supports you throughout long days. Give your feet the advantage of Wolverine engineering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Wolverine, I-90, Waterproof, Construction\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Wolverine","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46649034146027,"sku":"7-9 \/ LPNO339903907","price":66.05,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/41299abb-cc83-4225-a5f6-18a411a90385.jpg?v=1753854373"},{"product_id":"clerkmans-doctoral-gown-set-54xl-8bbe","title":"CLERKMANS Unisex Deluxe Doctoral Graduation Gown Set 54XL (5'9\"-5'11\") - 8 Sided Tam","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003ePreviously Owned, Like New\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCelebrate every milestone with dignity in the CLERKMANS Unisex Deluxe Doctoral Graduation Gown Set 54XL. Designed for 5'9\" to 5'11\", it offers a distinguished, comfortable fit for all graduands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Doctoral Deluxe Gown Set blends elegance and tradition. The set includes a premium doctoral gown and a classic 8-sided tam. Both items use high-quality, matte fabric for a sophisticated, crease-resistant look. Handmade tailoring enhances the fit, ensuring that every wearer feels special on graduation day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe gown’s unique features stand out. Tailored fluting along the shoulders and yoke gives an elegant, regal appearance. Lined bell sleeves feature triple chevron velvet, just 2 inches wide, for tradition and visual interest. Four-inch velvet panels on the yoke bring depth and distinction to your attire. A matching zipper and hook eye clasp ensure secure closure, while strong stitching makes every seam durable and reliable for repeat use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Doctoral Deluxe Gown Set, comfort is a priority. The lightweight yet sturdy fabric allows you to remain at ease for long ceremonies. The cut is unisex, designed for both men and women. You can move with confidence, knowing your graduation robe maintains its shape and grace. For extra convenience, a small button at the back neck lets you attach an academic hood. Customize your regalia for any event that requires academic dress.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included 8-sided tam is plush velvet. It adjusts easily and fits most head sizes comfortably. The classic design gives graduates and faculty a polished, traditional look. Wear it for your commencement, convocation, or official ceremonies. The tam’s velvet construction feels soft and secure during hours of wear. Its shape stays crisp with every use, making it ideal for students in doctoral programs and university faculty.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Doctoral Gown Set goes beyond looks. Its strong build ensures it will last for several academic events. Whether you use it for your graduation or while attending ceremonies as faculty, the CLERKMANS set maintains its structure and finish. You are investing in a gown designed to be part of your academic journey for the long term, adding true value to your wardrobe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAcademic regalia such as this set symbolize achievement and scholarly tradition. Wearing proper attire speaks to your discipline and accomplishment. Each detail, from velvet chevrons to the yoke panels, has specific meaning within academic dress. Learn more about these traditions on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Academic_dress\"\u003eWikipedia page on Academic Dress\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for a graduation ensemble for a friend or family member? This set makes an excellent, memorable gift. Its carefully chosen materials and deluxe tailoring ensure the wearer stands out. Each set comes inspected to guarantee a like-new condition, so you receive both quality and value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePair your Doctoral Deluxe Gown Set with cords, stoles, or hoods from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eApparel Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Create a look as unique as your academic journey. This collection offers apparel pieces that match the style and excellence of your CLERKMANS gown set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What makes the CLERKMANS gown’s material unique?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The fabric is dull-finished and matte, offering a refined look that resists creasing. This material lets you maintain a fresh appearance during long events. The velvet on the tam and sleeve chevrons also stays soft and smooth, while the matte body keeps its shape. Commitment to quality materials sets this Doctoral Deluxe Gown Set apart from standard options.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the unisex design suitable for all academic roles?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The unisex cut fits both men and women easily. Whether you are a doctoral candidate, professor, or academic speaker, the set adapts well to different body shapes. The tailored seams guarantee a neat, consistent fit. With adjustable features and generous sizing, anyone from student to faculty can wear this gown for ceremonies and picture sessions.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should I pick my correct size for this set?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This 54XL set is right for people between 5'9\" and 5'11\" in height. Always check your height and compare with sizing guidelines before ordering. Consider sleeve length and gown drape, especially if you intend to layer with other academic dress items. Proper fit brings confidence to your ceremony.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can the tam accommodate various hairstyles or headwear?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tam adjusts using a built-in system. This means it fits most head sizes and can work with various hairstyles or light head coverings. Its eight-sided shape avoids pressure spots, making it comfortable to wear even over styled or natural hair. Getting the right fit is simple—just adjust and secure for the ceremony.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the hood attachment work, and what are its benefits?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The back neck button lets you secure an academic hood fast and easily. This feature is important for those who need to follow specific university dress codes. Using the hood button keeps your ensemble tidy. Your academic colors will show correctly, adding to your gown’s overall effect.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes the CLERKMANS gown’s material unique?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The fabric is dull-finished and matte, offering a refined look that resists creasing. This material lets you maintain a fresh appearance during long events. The velvet on the tam and sleeve chevrons also stays soft and smooth, while the matte body keeps its shape. Commitment to quality materials sets this Doctoral Deluxe Gown Set apart from standard options.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the unisex design suitable for all academic roles?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The unisex cut fits both men and women easily. Whether you are a doctoral candidate, professor, or academic speaker, the set adapts well to different body shapes. The tailored seams guarantee a neat, consistent fit. With adjustable features and generous sizing, anyone from student to faculty can wear this gown for ceremonies and picture sessions.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How should I pick my correct size for this set?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This 54XL set is right for people between 5'9\\\" and 5'11\\\" in height. Always check your height and compare with sizing guidelines before ordering. Consider sleeve length and gown drape, especially if you intend to layer with other academic dress items. Proper fit brings confidence to your ceremony.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can the tam accommodate various hairstyles or headwear?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The tam adjusts using a built-in system. This means it fits most head sizes and can work with various hairstyles or light head coverings. Its eight-sided shape avoids pressure spots, making it comfortable to wear even over styled or natural hair. Getting the right fit is simple—just adjust and secure for the ceremony.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the hood attachment work, and what are its benefits?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The back neck button lets you secure an academic hood fast and easily. This feature is important for those who need to follow specific university dress codes. Using the hood button keeps your ensemble tidy. Your academic colors will show correctly, adding to your gown’s overall effect.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExplore more about the history and meaning of academic dress on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Academic_dress\"\u003eWikipedia page on Academic Dress\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVisit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eApparel Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for other options to complete your graduation look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: doctoral, gown, unisex, tam.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"CLERKMANS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46652441657579,"sku":"LPNO345861516","price":85.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Screenshot_2026-03-17_072334.png?v=1773703441"},{"product_id":"renice-512gb-external-ssd-up-to-1000mb-s-usb-3-2-gen2-external-solid-state-drive-fingerprint-encryption-portable-ssd-for-mac-android-tabletsmartphone","title":"RENICE Silver 512GB External SSD 1000MB\/s USB 3.2 Gen2 Fingerprint OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — Open box, item was tested and appears new.\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — item was tested and appears new.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeet the RENICE 512GB Portable External SSD — a sleek, silver aluminium drive that puts hardware-level fingerprint encryption right at your fingertip. Designed for professionals, creatives, and anyone who carries sensitive data on the go, this drive combines blistering USB 3.2 Gen 2 transfer speeds with EAL5+ certified security. Whether you're backing up RAW photo shoots, moving large video files between workstations, or simply protecting personal documents, the RENICE delivers both performance and peace of mind in a pocket-sized form factor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe built-in fingerprint sensor uses hardware encryption — not software — meaning your data stays locked even if someone physically removes the NAND chips. No passwords to remember, no software to install on the host machine. Just press your registered finger and your drive unlocks instantly. Up to multiple fingerprints can be enrolled, making it easy to share securely with trusted team members.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePerformance You Can Count On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePushing up to \u003cstrong\u003e1,000 MB\/s read speeds\u003c\/strong\u003e over the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, this drive is fast enough to edit 4K video directly from the drive. The exFAT format out of the box means it works natively across Windows, Mac, Android, and HarmonyOS 2.0 without reformatting. Its compact dimensions — just 4.33 in × 1.41 in × 0.35 in — mean it slips into any pocket or bag without adding bulk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRENICE 512GB Fingerprint Encrypted Portable SSD (Silver)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAccessories as originally packaged (open-box unit; contents appear complete and new)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e RENICE\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStorage Capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 512 GB\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterface:\u003c\/strong\u003e USB 3.2 Gen 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRead Speed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,000 MB\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Rate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,000 MB\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStorage Format:\u003c\/strong\u003e exFAT\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSecurity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fingerprint Encryption, EAL5+ Hardware Encryption\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eColor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Silver\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eForm Factor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Portable\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4.33 in × 1.41 in × 0.35 in\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible With:\u003c\/strong\u003e Windows, Mac, Android, HarmonyOS 2.0\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCountry of Origin:\u003c\/strong\u003e China\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is an open-box unit that has been tested and presents as new. It is a great opportunity to get a premium encrypted portable SSD at a reduced price. All sales are final; please review photos and specs carefully before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"RENICE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46655666159851,"sku":"LPNO290844554","price":62.38,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/Untitled_design_52.png?v=1754469135"},{"product_id":"casabolaj-triomphe-queen-duvet-b387","title":"Casabolaj Triomphe Collection 3-Piece Queen Duvet Cover Set - 100% Egyptian Cott","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background: #111; color: #e5ca9f; padding: 12px 14px; border-radius: 8px; font-family: monospace; font-size: 14px; margin: 0 0 16px 0;\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Like New, Still In Packaging, Includes 2 Pillow Cases 1 Sheet\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003e\u003cem\u003eLike New, Still In Packaging\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExperience everyday luxury with the Casabolaj Triomphe Collection 3-Piece Queen Duvet Cover Set. This set is carefully crafted from 100% Egyptian cotton sateen. It features a 400 thread count. The warm champagne khaki color fits classic or modern bedrooms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis queen duvet cover set provides soft comfort every night. The Egyptian cotton material is known for its smooth feel. The sateen weave creates a subtle shine and a sleek surface. Short and long fibers combine for a balanced, breathable texture. This makes the bedding comfortable for every season. Your bedroom gains instant elegance with this timeless look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach set includes one duvet cover (94 inches x 92 inches) and two pillow shams (20 inches x 28 inches). The duvet cover is generously sized to fit most queen beds. The set features handmade double piping ropes around the edges. Each pillow sham is decorated with a three-inch flange. These small touches bring refined detail to your bedding ensemble.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure your comforter with four inside corner ties. The cover stays fixed, preventing the insert from moving. A button closure keeps your insert in place all night. Both the duvet and shams resist wrinkles and fading. Simply wash with your machine—no special care is needed. This saves you time and keeps your set looking new for years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability is key with Egyptian cotton. The strong fibers resist piling and tearing. Artisans use over a decade of skill to build long-lasting seams. This handcrafted detail ensures the duvet set remains part of your home for many seasons. Choosing this set means investing in comfort and style for the long term.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou may wish to add extra layers of luxury to your bed. Matching Euro shams and sheet sets—sold separately—are designed to complement your duvet set. With coordinating items, you can create a seamless, curated bedroom look. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\"\u003ehome Collection\u003c\/a\u003e to discover more bedding possibilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhy choose Egyptian cotton? It is famous for its extraordinary softness and exceptional strength. The long staple fibers are rare, making the fabric smoother and less likely to pill. A 400 thread count means each square inch contains 400 yarns, ensuring pure luxury. These qualities make Egyptian cotton bedding an excellent choice for anyone who values comfort, durability, and style. For extra information about Egyptian cotton, see the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Egyptian_cotton\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\"\u003eWikipedia article\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Casabolaj Triomphe duvet cover set is an exceptional gift for new homeowners, newlyweds, or anyone upgrading their bedding. It brings comfort, style, and a hint of luxury into your daily life. Its timeless design suits every decor trend. Place this set and instantly refresh your space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is included in the Casabolaj Triomphe Collection 3-Piece Queen Duvet Cover Set?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Inside your package, you will find one queen duvet cover (measuring 94 by 92 inches) and two matching pillow shams (each 20 by 28 inches). These sizes work for most queen mattresses and pillows. Please note, the set does not include a duvet insert or pillow fillings. You will need to supply your own inserts to complete the comfort of your bedding arrangement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the duvet cover machine washable?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the duvet cover and pillow shams are fully machine washable. Wash with cold water on a gentle cycle, then tumble dry on a low setting if desired. The fabric is wrinkle-resistant and fade-resistant. This means your set maintains its crisp look wash after wash. There is no need for special handling, making everyday maintenance easy for busy households.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the duvet cover have ties to secure the insert?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes. Four interior ties are sewn into each corner of the duvet cover. Simply attach these ties to each corner of your duvet insert. The button closure also adds security. This design keeps the insert in place for an undisturbed night. No more bunching or shifting—your insert stays flat and secure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are matching sheets and Euro shams available for this set?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can find coordinating Euro shams and sheet sets sold separately. These items are made with the same high-quality Egyptian cotton and attention to detail. Choosing multiple pieces from the Triomphe Collection lets you create a unified, sophisticated look throughout your bedroom. Explore matching items in our home collection for a complete style.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What makes Egyptian cotton sateen special?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Egyptian cotton is sought after for its long, strong fibers. These produce bedding that is soft, smooth, and resistant to wear. The sateen weave adds extra sheen and a silky finish. This makes the fabric pleasant to touch and beautiful to display. Sateen also helps repel wrinkles, keeping bedding looking fresh. Egyptian cotton bedding is a luxurious upgrade for any bedroom.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your own bedding and indulge in the unmatched quality of Egyptian cotton. Let the Casabolaj Triomphe Collection 3-Piece Queen Duvet Cover Set transform your space. Enjoy lasting elegance, true comfort, and easy care. Add this set to your bedroom for a sleep experience that feels truly special and luxurious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Egyptian, cotton, duvet, cover\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"CASA BOLAJ DESIGNED TO DREAM","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46762383638763,"sku":"LPNO355975652","price":89.01,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/91uW_E8Y5CL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1756705147"},{"product_id":"revotune-rear-wheel-hub-assembly-2a4f","title":"REVOTUNE Rear Wheel Bearing Hub Assembly 2PCS FWD ABS OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, Open Box, Both (two) Rotors Included\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — appears brand new; both (two) hub assemblies are included and show no signs of prior installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis REVOTUNE rear wheel bearing and hub assembly set gives you a complete pair — driver side and passenger side — in a single purchase. Designed as a direct bolt-on replacement for FWD Hyundai and Kia crossovers, each hub features a pre-integrated ABS reluctor ring and attached sensor connector pigtail, so your anti-lock braking system plugs right back in without splicing or adapters. The 5-lug flange pattern matches the factory specification exactly, and wheel studs come pre-installed from the factory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth units show no scratches, corrosion, or bearing-race damage visible on the flanges or housings. The open-box condition is cosmetic only — the hubs themselves appear brand new and uninstalled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompatible with the following \u003cstrong\u003eFWD-only\u003c\/strong\u003e configurations:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHyundai Santa Fe — 2007 through 2018\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHyundai Veracruz — 2007 through 2012\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eKia Sorento — 2011 through 2015\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e AWD and 4WD variants of these vehicles require a different hub assembly. Always confirm your drivetrain configuration before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eComplete rear pair — both left and right hub assemblies included\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eIntegrated ABS reluctor ring; sensor connector pigtail attached\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e5-lug bolt pattern; pre-installed wheel studs\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSealed bearing design — keeps contaminants out for long service life\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHigh-strength cast-iron outer housing resists corrosion\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePrecision-ground internal bearing races for smooth, quiet operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBolt-on installation; no hydraulic press required\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eOEM-standard dimensions — no modifications needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e2 × REVOTUNE rear wheel bearing and hub assemblies (left + right)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e REVOTUNE\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuantity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 pieces (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePosition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rear (both sides)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrivetrain:\u003c\/strong\u003e FWD only\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLug count:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5-lug\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eABS:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes — integrated reluctor ring and sensor connector\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFits:\u003c\/strong\u003e Hyundai Santa Fe 2007–2018, Hyundai Veracruz 2007–2012, Kia Sorento 2011–2015 (FWD)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Replace Both Rear Hubs at Once?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear position is the most common wear point on FWD crossovers. A failing wheel bearing typically produces a humming or grinding noise that changes with vehicle speed and shifts pitch during cornering. Replacing both rear hubs simultaneously eliminates uneven wear, ensures matched bearing preload across the rear axle, and saves a second round of labor costs down the road. Addressing symptoms early also protects the spindle, axle shaft, and ABS system from secondary damage.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"REVOTUNE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46791530053867,"sku":"LPNO348274335","price":62.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61kVWVRw5YL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1757375715"},{"product_id":"carbon-fiber-mirror-covers-15c1","title":"Real Carbon Fiber Mirror Trim Covers BMW 2, 3, 4 M2, X1 Carbon Fiber Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, All Pieces Included, No Scuffs, Authentic Carbon Fiber\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Appears brand new, all parts included, no scuffs, authentic carbon fiber.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your BMW’s style with these real carbon fiber mirror trim covers. Designed for 2 Series, 3 Series, 4 Series, M2, and X1, they add luxury while also offering strength and lightness. Improve your BMW’s look quickly with a product built for fit and ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach set of trim covers is made from glossy, high-quality 3K carbon fiber. The finish protects against UV and resists fading or yellowing, keeping your BMW looking sharp in all weather. Install these with no drilling or cutting. Each piece clips in using the original mounting points, and the kit comes with illustrated instructions for simple installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith precise 3D mold shaping, the covers follow your BMW’s mirror lines. They give a factory fit that blends with the car’s design. Carbon fiber construction means each piece is light yet strong. Installing these mirror covers can help reduce mirror weight. Lighter mirrors can provide a small improvement in handling, especially at higher speeds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCovers are made for BMW models from 2012 to 2018, including the 1 Series F20 F21, 2 Series F22 F23, 3 Series F30 F31 F34, 4 Series F32 F33 F36, M2 F87, and X1 E84. Always check your model before ordering to make sure you choose the right fit. These covers are a great choice for drivers who want a stylish look and easy upgrade. Beauty and performance can go hand-in-hand on the road.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese mirror covers do more than enhance looks. The carbon fiber finish adds a sporty, exclusive touch, helping your BMW stand apart. If you attend car meets or just want to turn heads, these covers make an impression without being over-the-top. Most owners can install them in less than 30 minutes with basic hand tools – no garage visit needed. Full instructions and the right hardware are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompared to painted plastic, carbon fiber is much stronger and lighter, resisting chips and cracks. The weave pattern is unique for every set, giving both subtlety and character. If you maintain your car well, these covers will hold up year after year. Cleaning is easy – just wipe with a microfiber cloth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInterested in the science behind carbon fiber? Read more about strength and use at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Carbon_fiber_reinforced_polymer\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e. Looking for more upgrades? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our automotive collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these carbon fiber mirror covers compatible with every BMW model?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These covers fit specific BMW models from 2012 to 2018, like the 2 Series F22 F23 and the 3 Series F30 F34. Some other models like M2 F87 and X1 E84 are also supported. It’s important to check your car’s year and model code. Not all BMWs use the same mirror housing, and fit may not be exact outside this range. Double-check your car’s specs or contact us for advice before you purchase if you are unsure.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the process to install carbon mirror covers, and is it possible for me to do it at home?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, most owners can install these at home with no professional help. The process starts with removing your old mirror covers, gently prying them off with a trim tool to avoid damage. Then you click these carbon fiber covers into the same places. Use even pressure and make sure each tab locks. The covers should sit flush without gaps. If you need help, the instruction sheet or video guide included walks you through each step. No glue or extra hardware is needed unless specified in your package.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do these carbon fiber mirror covers hold up over many years? Will they fade or yellow from sun exposure?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The mirror covers are coated with a clear UV-resistant finish. This layer is designed to keep the carbon fiber dark and glossy for years, even if you park outside often. While all materials show wear, these covers are resistant to yellowing, thanks to their strong UV protection. Wipe with a soft, damp cloth to keep them looking new.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can these mirror covers be painted or wrapped to match my BMW exactly?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These covers are meant to showcase the carbon fiber weave and gloss – that is often the point of choosing this part, as it offers a high-performance look. Most owners leave the covers as they are. Painting or wrapping might make the UV finish less effective and could hide the weave pattern. If you want a full body-colored look, consider OEM-style covers.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will these covers affect my side mirror functions, like adjustment, folding, or signal lights?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The covers are thin and precisely shaped, so they do not block adjustment motors, folding, or signal indicators. You can use all factory mirror features. If installing, confirm that all movement remains smooth. If anything feels stiff, check that the covers are not pinched or installed incorrectly.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these carbon fiber mirror covers compatible with every BMW model?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These covers fit specific BMW models from 2012 to 2018, like the 2 Series F22 F23 and the 3 Series F30 F34. Some other models like M2 F87 and X1 E84 are also supported. It’s important to check your car’s year and model code. Not all BMWs use the same mirror housing, and fit may not be exact outside this range. Double-check your car’s specs or contact us for advice before you purchase if you are unsure.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the process to install carbon mirror covers, and is it possible for me to do it at home?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, most owners can install these at home with no professional help. The process starts with removing your old mirror covers, gently prying them off with a trim tool to avoid damage. Then you click these carbon fiber covers into the same places. Use even pressure and make sure each tab locks. The covers should sit flush without gaps. If you need help, the instruction sheet or video guide included walks you through each step. No glue or extra hardware is needed unless specified in your package.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do these carbon fiber mirror covers hold up over many years? Will they fade or yellow from sun exposure?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The mirror covers are coated with a clear UV-resistant finish. This layer is designed to keep the carbon fiber dark and glossy for years, even if you park outside often. While all materials show wear, these covers are resistant to yellowing, thanks to their strong UV protection. Wipe with a soft, damp cloth to keep them looking new.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can these mirror covers be painted or wrapped to match my BMW exactly?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These covers are meant to showcase the carbon fiber weave and gloss – that is often the point of choosing this part, as it offers a high-performance look. Most owners leave the covers as they are. Painting or wrapping might make the UV finish less effective and could hide the weave pattern. If you want a full body-colored look, consider OEM-style covers.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will these covers affect my side mirror functions, like adjustment, folding, or signal lights?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The covers are thin and precisely shaped, so they do not block adjustment motors, folding, or signal indicators. You can use all factory mirror features. If installing, confirm that all movement remains smooth. If anything feels stiff, check that the covers are not pinched or installed incorrectly.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your BMW with carbon fiber mirror covers. Enjoy their style, strength, and light weight every day. Add value and eye-catching detail by choosing these carbon, fiber, mirror, and covers – four keywords that define quality.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Fancemot","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46794232103147,"sku":"LPNO380504149","price":51.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/718zmOyicUL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1757397216"},{"product_id":"lebra-front-end-cover-dodge-nitro-0642","title":"Lebra 2-Piece Front End Cover Black - Car Mask Bra for Dodge Nitro 2007-2010","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eThis LeBra Front End Cover looks brand new. Both pieces and instructions are included. No signs of previous use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProtect and enhance your Dodge Nitro (2007-2010) with the LeBra 2-Piece Front End Cover. This black car mask bra fits your vehicle perfectly. It provides a reliable barrier against bugs, small rocks, and road debris. This helps your Dodge Nitro stay looking great for years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe LeBra Front End Cover is made from tough leather-grain vinyl. This vinyl is built to last and handles any weather. Rain, sun, or snow will not damage it. The cover’s micro-perforated design keeps it breathable. After a downpour, the cover dries fast. Its soft lining prevents scratches, helping your vehicle’s paint stay smooth and shiny.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis car bra features a convenient two-piece design. You can open the hood without removing the entire cover. That means easy access for checking oil or filling fluids. The installation is quick and simple. You do not need any drills or complicated tools. Just follow the instructions, and you’re ready to go. The car mask is shaped to match the Dodge Nitro. The result is a tight, custom fit that keeps it secure while you drive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProtecting your Dodge Nitro’s front end is important if you want to keep your vehicle's value high. Everyday driving can cause damage from pebbles or insects. Over time, these marks can lower your car’s resale price. The LeBra cover acts as a shield. It helps keep your SUV in top condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe LeBra 2-Piece Front End Cover also adds a stylish accent. Its sleek black look complements your Dodge Nitro. It’s both functional and attractive. You can drive confidently, knowing your car looks good and is protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWorried about maintenance? You do not need to be. The cover is easy to remove and clean. Just take it off and wipe it down. Because of the micro-perforations, you do not have to wait long for it to dry. The cover is built to handle repeated washes without cracking or fading. This long-lasting quality makes it a smart investment for your Dodge Nitro.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePrecision fit for Dodge Nitro 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eRugged leather-grain vinyl resists cracks and fading.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBreathable with micro-perforated texture for quick drying.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSoft inner surface keeps your paint safe from scratches.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eTwo-piece build lets you reach the engine without removal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo tools or drilling required. Instructions make install easy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose LeBra?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLeBra is a trusted brand for automotive accessories. Their products are known for precision and durability. This car bra is made to look like it belongs on your Dodge Nitro. It defends your vehicle from common road damage. Many owners choose LeBra over generic covers. The tailored design and quality materials make a big difference. You can learn more about LeBra’s history and commitment to vehicle protection on their official \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.covercraft.com\/us\/en\/product\/lebra-custom-front-end-cover\/prod-lebrafrontmask\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003emanufacturer website\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this LeBra Front End Cover compatible with my Dodge Nitro if it is a 2009 model?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes. This LeBra cover is designed for Dodge Nitro models from 2007 to 2010. It will fit your 2009 Nitro perfectly because it matches the shape and contours of these years. Other model years may not have the same lines, so this cover is tailored to be snug and effective only for 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 Dodges.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do I need any special tools to install the LeBra Front End Cover?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e No tools are necessary. The installation is simple and user-friendly. Each cover comes with clear instructions. You just need to line up the pieces and secure them as instructed. The two-piece setup also means you can remove or adjust one section at a time for maintenance. Installation is usually complete within minutes, even for beginners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the car mask bra damage my vehicle's paint in the long run?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e No. The cover’s inner surface is soft and gentle on paint. It is designed to avoid scratches and reduce friction. The breathable material keeps moisture from getting trapped. That means your paintwork stays dry and safe, which can help prevent rust or fading. Regularly cleaning both the cover and your vehicle’s front end will ensure your paint remains in great shape.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can the LeBra cover be cleaned easily? How should I care for it?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cleaning the cover is simple. Just remove it from the vehicle and wash with mild soap and water. Rinse thoroughly and let it air dry. Thanks to the micro-perforated design, drying time is short. Do not use harsh chemicals, as these may damage the vinyl. Store in a cool, dry place if not in use for long periods. Routine cleaning helps maintain the appearance and prolongs the cover’s life.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\",\"name\": \"Is this LeBra Front End Cover compatible with my Dodge Nitro if it is a 2009 model?\",\"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\",\"text\": \"Yes. This LeBra cover is designed for Dodge Nitro models from 2007 to 2010. It will fit your 2009 Nitro perfectly because it matches the shape and contours of these years. Other model years may not have the same lines, so this cover is tailored to be snug and effective only for 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 Dodges.\"}},{\"@type\": \"Question\",\"name\": \"Do I need any special tools to install the LeBra Front End Cover?\",\"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\",\"text\": \"No tools are necessary. The installation is simple and user-friendly. Each cover comes with clear instructions. You just need to line up the pieces and secure them as instructed. The two-piece setup also means you can remove or adjust one section at a time for maintenance. Installation is usually complete within minutes, even for beginners.\"}},{\"@type\": \"Question\",\"name\": \"Will the car mask bra damage my vehicle's paint in the long run?\",\"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\",\"text\": \"No. The cover’s inner surface is soft and gentle on paint. It is designed to avoid scratches and reduce friction. The breathable material keeps moisture from getting trapped. That means your paintwork stays dry and safe, which can help prevent rust or fading. Regularly cleaning both the cover and your vehicle’s front end will ensure your paint remains in great shape.\"}},{\"@type\": \"Question\",\"name\": \"Can the LeBra cover be cleaned easily? How should I care for it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\",\"text\": \"Cleaning the cover is simple. Just remove it from the vehicle and wash with mild soap and water. Rinse thoroughly and let it air dry. Thanks to the micro-perforated design, drying time is short. Do not use harsh chemicals, as these may damage the vinyl. Store in a cool, dry place if not in use for long periods. Routine cleaning helps maintain the appearance and prolongs the cover’s life.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for other ways to protect and accessorize your vehicle? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more quality products.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin-top:18px;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeywords:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dodge, LeBra, Cover, Nitro\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"LIBRA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46858715758827,"sku":"LPNO341454544","price":70.87,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/41_1UuoTq2L._AC_SL1000.jpg?v=1757918720"},{"product_id":"jecar-exterior-trim-kit-red-a496","title":"JeCar Exterior Trim Kits for Jeep Wrangler JL JLU 2018-2023 – Enhance Your Ride","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eNearly all pieces are in original packaging. No visible signs of use. Everything looks brand new, with all parts included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your \u003cstrong\u003eJeep\u003c\/strong\u003e with the JeCar Exterior Trim Kit. This kit fits Jeep Wrangler JL and JLU models from 2018 to 2023. It is a great way to refresh and protect your vehicle’s look in minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003eJeCar\u003c\/strong\u003e kit boasts robust ABS plastic construction. The material provides tough protection for your Jeep. All pieces—door hinge covers, hood hinge covers, two door handle covers, side vent trims, and tailgate hinge covers—are engineered for a snug fit. They work with both 2-door and 4-door Jeep Wrangler JL and JLU. ABS plastic resists scratches and corrosion, keeping your Jeep in top shape even in rough conditions.\u003cbr\u003e\nThe bright red color creates a bold, unique look for your Jeep. The color stands out, both on city streets and off-road. Few upgrades transform your Jeep’s style this quickly. If you want to turn heads, this trim kit is an easy choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the \u003cstrong\u003eJeCar\u003c\/strong\u003e trim kit is simple. Each piece comes with strong double-sided adhesive. To apply, first clean the surface. Next, peel the adhesive’s backing. Press the trim firmly in place, and let it set for best results. No drilling, cutting, or special tools needed. You can finish the job in less than an hour by yourself. This kit is designed for at-home, DIY Jeep owners needing a hassle-free upgrade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot only does the trim boost style and stand out, but it also serves an important protective role. By covering door handles, vent edges, and hinges, you shield these spots from scratches, chips, and wear. The trim helps defend from grit, stones, harsh weather, and sun, all common Jeep threats. Benefits include better long-term looks and increased resale value.\u003cbr\u003e\nFor off-roaders and city drivers alike, rugged \u003cstrong\u003eJeep\u003c\/strong\u003e exterior trim helps prevent common dings. It reduces paint chipping on exposed Jeep parts. This kind of protection is vital if you love trails and adventure or use your Jeep as a daily driver.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eJeCar designed this kit for the most popular Wrangler models: JL and JLU from 2018-2023. If you drive a JL Sport or Rubicon, this kit works. If you have a Sahara or Willys, it fits these too. The kit’s versatility makes it a leading choice among \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Jeep_Wrangler\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eJeep\u003c\/a\u003e fans. You can trust the JeCar brand for tested, quality upgrades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to value and looks, the kit’s easy installation means no risky modifications. You keep your original paint and finish safe during upgrades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will this trim kit fit my Jeep Wrangler JL or JLU?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The JeCar Exterior Trim Kit is designed for all Jeep Wrangler JL and JLU models, year ranges 2018 to 2023. It fits both 2-door and 4-door styles, including the most popular trims. Always confirm your Jeep's year and body type before purchase, as this ensures maximum fit and satisfaction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is installation really tool-free? What preparation helps?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, installation requires no drilling and no tools. Simply wash and dry the application area. Remove the adhesive backing and press each cover firmly in place. Apply steady pressure for 2-3 minutes. For best results, install in a warm, dry environment. This helps the adhesive bond securely. You can check fit before installation, as the process allows repositioning if undone quickly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the trim's red color or shine last over years?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The JeCar trim pieces are molded from sturdy ABS plastic and covered with a special finish. This finish is built for UV and weather resistance. Exposure to sun, rain, or snow will not cause fading, dulling, or cracking. The covers keep their red color and shine for years with only minimal care. If needed, clean gently with a soap-and-water cloth, and avoid harsh chemicals to keep the look bright and new.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What makes ABS plastic a good choice for these parts?\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e ABS plastic is well-known for being lightweight but very tough. It is impact-resistant, so it offers real protection instead of simple decoration. The material does not rust, making it superior to many metals for exterior use. It is also easy to shape, which allows each trim piece to match your Jeep perfectly. For automotive upgrades, ABS plastic balances cost, durability, and looks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will this trim kit fit my Jeep Wrangler JL or JLU?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The JeCar Exterior Trim Kit is designed for all Jeep Wrangler JL and JLU models, year ranges 2018 to 2023. It fits both 2-door and 4-door styles, including the most popular trims. Always confirm your Jeep's year and body type before purchase, as this ensures maximum fit and satisfaction.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is installation really tool-free? What preparation helps?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, installation requires no drilling and no tools. Simply wash and dry the application area. Remove the adhesive backing and press each cover firmly in place. Apply steady pressure for 2-3 minutes. For best results, install in a warm, dry environment. This helps the adhesive bond securely. You can check fit before installation, as the process allows repositioning if undone quickly.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will the trim's red color or shine last over years?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The JeCar trim pieces are molded from sturdy ABS plastic and covered with a special finish. This finish is built for UV and weather resistance. Exposure to sun, rain, or snow will not cause fading, dulling, or cracking. The covers keep their red color and shine for years with only minimal care. If needed, clean gently with a soap-and-water cloth, and avoid harsh chemicals to keep the look bright and new.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes ABS plastic a good choice for these parts?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"ABS plastic is well-known for being lightweight but very tough. It is impact-resistant, so it offers real protection instead of simple decoration. The material does not rust, making it superior to many metals for exterior use. It is also easy to shape, which allows each trim piece to match your Jeep perfectly. For automotive upgrades, ABS plastic balances cost, durability, and looks.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your \u003cstrong\u003eJeep\u003c\/strong\u003e with proven accessories. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003eJeCar\u003c\/strong\u003e Exterior Trim Kit for long-lasting value, style, and protection. To see more options and related parts for your Jeep, visit our full \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eautomotive collection\u003c\/a\u003e. To learn more about Wrangler history, design, or models, check out the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Jeep_Wrangler\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eofficial Wikipedia entry\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Jeep, JeCar, exterior, ABS\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"JeCar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46870725591275,"sku":"LPNO373262549","price":64.79,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71T0Km2jqkL._AC_SX679.jpg?v=1758174896"},{"product_id":"trq-rear-wheel-bearing-hub-assembly-mitsubishi-lancer-outlander-8597","title":"TRQ BHA51630 Rear Wheel Hub Bearing Assembly Pair Mitsubishi Lancer Outlander","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, Does Not Show Any Signs Of Use On Either Wheel Bearing, Both Included\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — both rear wheel hub bearing assemblies appear brand new and show no signs of use or wear, ready for installation straight out of the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a TRQ 2-piece rear wheel hub and bearing assembly set designed specifically for AWD (all-wheel-drive) variants of the Mitsubishi Lancer (2012–2017) and Mitsubishi Outlander (2007–2013). If your Mitsubishi is a front-wheel-drive (FWD) model, these assemblies will not fit — always confirm your vehicle's drivetrain configuration before ordering. TRQ is a well-regarded aftermarket supplier known for precision-engineered replacement parts that meet or exceed original equipment standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWorn or failing rear wheel bearings can cause a range of problems: grinding or humming noises at speed, vague steering feel, uneven or accelerated tire wear, and in serious cases, compromised braking performance. Replacing both rear hub assemblies at the same time restores proper wheel bearing function on both sides and eliminates the risk of the second unit failing shortly after the first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach assembly features a robust steel housing with durable seals designed to keep out water, road grime, and dust. The direct-fit design means no cutting, drilling, or major modification — the assemblies bolt directly into the factory mounting positions. Whether you are a DIY mechanic or working alongside a professional, installation is straightforward with standard tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePart number visible on both units in the photo: HA590258. Both units in this listing are included. This set covers the driver-side and passenger-side rear positions for AWD-equipped vehicles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e2 × TRQ rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies (HA590258 — driver and passenger side)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eNote: Mounting bolts and nuts are not included. Inspect your existing hardware during installation and replace any fasteners showing rust or damage.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey Specs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e TRQ\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePart Number:\u003c\/strong\u003e HA590258\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePosition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rear (left and right)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuantity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 pieces (pair)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrivetrain Compatibility:\u003c\/strong\u003e AWD only — not for FWD models\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFitment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mitsubishi Lancer 2012–2017 AWD; Mitsubishi Outlander 2007–2013 AWD\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWarranty:\u003c\/strong\u003e TRQ limited lifetime warranty against manufacturing defects\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy Replace Your Rear Hub Bearings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNeglecting worn hub bearings can escalate quickly into costly suspension or brake damage. Fresh TRQ assemblies restore smooth, quiet wheel rotation, proper ABS sensor function (where applicable), and safe handling. Investing in a quality pair now saves money and keeps your Mitsubishi performing reliably mile after mile.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"TRQ","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46870729818347,"sku":"LPNO374516261","price":87.43,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71ORZxEh5wL._SL1500.jpg?v=1758175050"},{"product_id":"hayward-drain-cover-2ebd","title":"Hayward WGX1032BHF2 12-Inch White High Flow Square Drain Cover with Inner Frame","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, No Signs Of Use, All Parts Included And Still In Original Packaging\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eBrand New, Unused, All Parts Included, Original Packaging\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hayward WGX1032BHF2 12-Inch White High Flow Square Drain Cover with Inner Frame is an ideal solution for robust pool water movement and safety. This drain cover has a high flow rate and superior construction. It is designed to meet demanding pool needs and strict industry standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDurability is a hallmark of the Hayward WGX1032BHF2 drain cover. It is made with injection-molded ABS plastic. This material withstands pool chemicals and daily wear. The drain cover maintains its reliable, white finish for years. Pool owners do not have to worry about yellowing or brittleness. It is a lasting investment in pool safety and appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis model is best suited for concrete pools. The installation process is quick and easy. The 12-inch by 12-inch square frame fits perfectly into existing Hayward settings. No need for complex adjustments or extra tools. This ensures less downtime for your pool. It also reduces labor costs for both new builds and replacements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOne key feature is its impressive water flow capacity. On the pool floor, it delivers up to 515 gallons per minute. On the wall, it handles 308 gallons per minute. This high throughput keeps water circulating efficiently. Proper water movement helps avoid debris buildup and makes maintenance easier. The strong and steady flow also aids your pool’s filtration system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSafety is at the core of this Hayward product. It complies with the Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act. That means it meets major safety standards like ASME A112.19.8b-2009, ANSI\/APSP-16, and CPSC guidelines. Families and businesses trust this drain cover to help prevent entrapment hazards. These measures create a safer swimming environment for everyone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVersatility is another advantage. The drain cover is made to retrofit all Hayward drain frames. This makes it suitable for updating older pools or installing in new ones. Owners do not have to switch brands or frames. Compatibility is built into the design and helps avoid installation surprises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hayward WGX1032BHF2 is backed by a 7-year expected life and a 1-year limited warranty. These safeguards show the manufacturer’s confidence in product performance. Support is available for questions or concerns. The long lifespan means fewer replacements and better value for your investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use the Hayward WGX1032BHF2 with a frame that is not Hayward brand?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This drain cover is made for Hayward frames and works best with them. Using non-Hayward frames could affect the fit and compromise safety. Safety standards are tested and certified when this cover is matched with its intended frame. If you have a non-Hayward frame, you should consult a pool professional before attempting installation. This ensures your pool remains compliant and safe for all swimmers.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What makes ABS plastic a good choice for pool drain covers?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e ABS plastic is strong, resists chemicals, and stays white even after long-term use in pools. It does not crack under temperature changes or UV light exposure. Pool drain covers need to survive underwater stress and regular cleaning chemicals. ABS plastic also provides a smooth surface, making it easier to clean and less prone to catching dirt. This material is chosen by leading manufacturers for these reasons and helps prolong the service life of your drain cover.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does this model boost safety more than older drain covers?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Hayward WGX1032BHF2 meets strict federal safety acts like the VGB Act. Its design prevents most accidental entrapments by spreading suction force evenly. Older drain covers sometimes lacked this tested structure. Also, certification to ANSI\/APSP-16 and CPSC means this model has passed extra checks. It allows families, facilities, and service professionals to trust that the pool meets the latest legal and safety rules.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What regular care does this drain cover need?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintenance is simple for the Hayward WGX1032BHF2. It should be inspected for cracks, loose screws, or blocked slots about once a month. Rinsing it with water helps remove any buildup or debris. It is also important to check the surrounding pool tiles for any shifts. If the pool is resurfaced or closed, check the integrity of both the frame and cover. Following these steps helps keep the drain cover secure and functional for many years.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use the Hayward WGX1032BHF2 with a frame that is not Hayward brand?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This drain cover is made for Hayward frames and works best with them. Using non-Hayward frames could affect the fit and compromise safety. Safety standards are tested and certified when this cover is matched with its intended frame. If you have a non-Hayward frame, you should consult a pool professional before attempting installation. This ensures your pool remains compliant and safe for all swimmers.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes ABS plastic a good choice for pool drain covers?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"ABS plastic is strong, resists chemicals, and stays white even after long-term use in pools. It does not crack under temperature changes or UV light exposure. Pool drain covers need to survive underwater stress and regular cleaning chemicals. ABS plastic also provides a smooth surface, making it easier to clean and less prone to catching dirt. This material is chosen by leading manufacturers for these reasons and helps prolong the service life of your drain cover.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does this model boost safety more than older drain covers?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Hayward WGX1032BHF2 meets strict federal safety acts like the VGB Act. Its design prevents most accidental entrapments by spreading suction force evenly. Older drain covers sometimes lacked this tested structure. Also, certification to ANSI\/APSP-16 and CPSC means this model has passed extra checks. It allows families, facilities, and service professionals to trust that the pool meets the latest legal and safety rules.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What regular care does this drain cover need?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Maintenance is simple for the Hayward WGX1032BHF2. It should be inspected for cracks, loose screws, or blocked slots about once a month. Rinsing it with water helps remove any buildup or debris. It is also important to check the surrounding pool tiles for any shifts. If the pool is resurfaced or closed, check the integrity of both the frame and cover. Following these steps helps keep the drain cover secure and functional for many years.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOverall, the Hayward WGX1032BHF2 12-Inch White High Flow Square Drain Cover with Inner Frame is a smart solution for pools needing dependable performance. The high-quality materials and advanced safety features help keep water clean and swimmers protected. The retrofit design means most pool owners can swap out old covers with less work. Pool professionals and homeowners both appreciate these benefits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more pool drain safety guidelines and resources, visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.cpsc.gov\/\"\u003eConsumer Product Safety Commission’s page\u003c\/a\u003e. For compatible products, see our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/all\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ecomplete collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Hayward, drain, cover, pool\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Hayward","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46870916628715,"sku":"LPNO373377310","price":97.18,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71Mdlnj-2OL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1758181649"},{"product_id":"auqdd-6pc-suspension-kit-bmw-68c5","title":"AUQDD Front Control Arm Ball Joint Kit BMW 128i 328i 6pc OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. 4 Out Of 6 Pieces Included, No Signs Of Use On Pieces, Like New\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — 4 of the original 6 pieces are included. All present pieces show absolutely no signs of use and are in like-new condition. Please review all photos carefully before purchasing to confirm which specific components are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an AUQDD front lower control arm and ball joint suspension kit designed for BMW 128i, 135i, 323i, 328i, and 335i models from 2006 to 2013. The full kit is a 6-piece set covering the E82, E88, E90, E91, E92, and E93 platform chassis — some of the most popular BMW platforms on the road. This open-box listing represents a significant saving off the $119.99 MSRP, and the included pieces are in pristine, uninstalled condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs shown in the photo, the kit includes cast aluminum front lower control arms with integrated rubber bushings at the inner pivot end and ball joint assemblies at the outer end. Sway bar end links with threaded ball-stud ends are also part of the full set. Locking nuts are included for secure installation. The aluminum construction reduces unsprung weight compared to steel OEM components, contributing to sharper steering response and improved ride quality. Each control arm is side-specific and stamped for easy left\/right identification during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe front lower control arm is a critical suspension component connecting the steering knuckle to the vehicle subframe. Worn arms and ball joints cause clunking over bumps, steering pull, and uneven tire wear. Replacing them restores factory suspension geometry and the precise handling BMW's E-series chassis is known for. The sealed rubber ball joint boots block contamination and extend service life. Always perform a four-wheel alignment after replacing suspension components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e4 of 6 original pieces (see photos for exact components present)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking nuts visible in photos\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOriginal kit full count: 6 pieces (2 control arms, 2 ball joint assemblies, 2 sway bar end links)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrand: AUQDD\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKit Size: 6-piece set (4 pieces included)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosition: Front Lower\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFitment: BMW 128i, 135i, 323i, 328i, 335i (2006–2013)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible Chassis: E82, E88, E90, E91, E92, E93\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaterial: Cast aluminum arms with rubber bushings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCondition: Open box, like-new, no signs of use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMSRP: $119.99\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a solid opportunity for a DIY BMW owner or shop looking to source quality front suspension hardware at a discount. Confirm fitment via your VIN before ordering. A professional alignment is strongly recommended after installation.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"AUQDD","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46928046391531,"sku":"LPNO340851632","price":51.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/618Wfj5FiBL._AC_SL1200.jpg?v=1759135208"},{"product_id":"kusatec-513296-front-hub-1152","title":"Wheel Hub Assembly KUSATEC 513296 [2 Pack] – Premium Front Bearing for Nissan \u0026 Infiniti","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eThe KUSATEC 513296 Front Wheel Hub and Bearing Assembly arrives brand new, sealed, and ready for installation. This set offers exceptional reliability and unwavering durability for your Nissan or Infiniti. Quality assurance is a guarantee with KUSATEC parts, letting you drive with peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis premium wheel hub and bearing assembly delivers vital support for the front wheels. Designed to restore the optimal performance of your vehicle’s suspension, this assembly delivers exceptional handling and safety. Strong bearing steel construction assures long service life, while OEM-level engineering ensures a precise fit and endless dependability. You get consistent and smooth wheel rotation every time. If your car's steering or wheel movement feels off, this is the perfect fix for issues caused by worn hubs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability is one of the KUSATEC 513296’s strongest benefits. Composed of heat-treated bearing steel, it resists heavy road use, extremes of temperature, and harsh conditions. The included parts are finished with anti-corrosion coatings to prevent rust—even in wet or salty climates. Longevity matters most for suspension parts, and this assembly is made to withstand years of tough driving without diminished performance. A precision-engineered seal blocks out debris and moisture, minimizing vibration and keeping rides quiet and comfortable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe advanced design provides a perfect fit for select Nissan Altima (2007-2018, 3.5L V6 only for 2007-2012), Maxima (2009-2019), and Murano (2009-2018), as well as Nissan Pathfinder (2013-2019), Infiniti JX35 (2013), and Infiniti QX60 (2014-2019). Vehicle compatibility is critical for safe installation. Always check your engine type and model year before purchasing. Using this assembly helps prevent more expensive future repairs due to poor wheel alignment or failing bearings. For full support, \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\"\u003eExplore our automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e to find more vehicle-specific options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach assembly supports smooth, safe driving under all road conditions. Factory testing for every unit ensures OEM performance standards. You’ll also find everything you need for installation in the box—two matching wear-resistant hubs, sealed ball bearings, and even two pairs of gloves for clean handling. Bolt pattern and thread specifications match factory equipment (4 flange holes, 5 lugs, M12X1.5 thread). While designed for do-it-yourselfers used to automotive repairs, using a certified technician for installation is recommended for the best longevity and maximum safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eQuality wheel hubs are essential for reliable steering and wheel control. Ignore squeaking, grinding, or vibration noises at your peril—these are early warning signs for hub failures. Regular monitoring, prompt inspection, and timely replacement save both your safety and your wallet. Installing both front wheel assemblies together ensures even tire wear, better alignment, and balanced handling for years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStocking this KUSATEC 2-Pack means you have a trusted repair option ready for fleet maintenance, personal vehicles, or emergency repairs. Its packaging is robust for shipping and storage. Many expert mechanics—even car enthusiasts—know that replacing wheel hubs in pairs pays off quickly with smoother rides, less shaking, and consistent control. This assembly is suitable for daily drivers, frequent long-distance vehicles, and high-mileage Nissan and Infiniti models. To learn even more about how wheel bearings work, see this detailed \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Wheel_bearing\"\u003eWikipedia: Wheel Bearing\u003c\/a\u003e article.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the KUSATEC 513296 assembly directly compatible with all engine options on every listed Nissan or Infiniti vehicle?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatibility depends heavily on engine size and vehicle year. For the 2007–2012 Nissan Altima, the 3.5L V6 is required for this hub to fit properly. Other models like Nissan Maxima, Murano, and Pathfinder have broader fitment, but you must always double-check your exact engine and chassis code. Engineering for each hub varies across engine types, so using the correct assembly prevents installation headaches and driving issues. Consult your owner's manual or a parts compatibility database before purchasing this hub. In general, always match the part number to your VIN or check your car’s service documentation first.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this wheel hub come with a warranty or installation support details?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This KUSATEC assembly usually includes strong manufacturer warranty coverage. Warranty periods can vary, depending on where you buy the kit. Warranty details—such as what damages are covered and for how long—are typically found on the product listing or with documentation in the box. While physical instructions are not always included, real product images provide a helpful reference. For peace of mind and correct installation, always review your retailer's warranty policy and keep all original receipts. Many auto parts stores and online shops also offer extended warranty programs you can consider for added protection. If in doubt about proper install, always seek out certified mechanics or online video resources.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What key indicators tell me it is time to replace my vehicle’s front wheel hub bearing assembly?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Timely replacement is essential for safety and performance. Some early signs include odd knocking, humming, or grinding sounds coming from wheel areas. You may also feel looseness or roughness in steering, or even see uneven tire wear. Over time, ignoring these warnings risks full wheel detachment or unsafe driving. Proactively addressing any noises, instability, or vibration leads to a much safer experience and often prevents costly downstream repairs. An inspection by a trusted mechanic can pinpoint whether your assembly is faulty. The KUSATEC 513296 is specifically engineered to restore reliable wheel rotation, wheel alignment, and vehicle handling for various Nissan and Infiniti models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis KUSATEC hub and bearing set stands apart in value and precision. Its robust packaging resists shipping damage, making it easy to store or have on hand for urgent automotive jobs. Pairing both front wheel assemblies at the same time is recommended, supporting even tread wear, steady wheel alignment, and an overall smoother driving experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KUSATEC focus on engineering excellence means these wheel hubs meet the demands of daily commutes, long highway trips, or tough city driving. Frequent vehicle checks and required maintenance, with genuine KUSATEC components, protect your investment. Driving confidence starts with strong wheel bearings, and this assembly provides continuous reliability where you need it most. Enjoy less noise, fewer vibrations, and consistent safety in every mile you travel.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeywords:\u003c\/strong\u003e wheel, hub, bearing, assembly\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"KUSATEC","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46930419187947,"sku":"LPNO371906323","price":79.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71If9PwcEAL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1759216986"},{"product_id":"mast-p20-wireless-tattoo-pen-00c4","title":"Mast P20 Wireless Tattoo Pen Machine – Slim Rotary Pen with Replaceable Batterie","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, Both Batteries Tested And Working\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eAppears Brand New, Both Batteries Tested And Working\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Mast P20 Wireless Tattoo Pen Machine provides artists with a lightweight, wireless tool for precision tattoo work. Designed for women, it combines a slim, ergonomic shape and reliable power to maximize comfort and efficiency in every session.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis tattoo machine weighs just 122 grams. Its compact, slim body (24.5mm wide and 143.8mm long) fits comfortably in your hand. The Mast P20 is easy to grip and reduces hand fatigue, helping you work longer without discomfort. The slim, efficient shape meets the needs of artists who want accuracy and control during intricate tattooing tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe device comes with two batteries, each delivering a robust 1000mAh power supply. You can count on 4 to 6 hours of uninterrupted operation per charge, making it reliable for long appointments. Charging takes about 2 hours per battery. Swap batteries easily so you never have to interrupt your workflow. This seamless battery transition is ideal for busy professionals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Mast P20 offers a stroke length of 2.5mm. This is perfect for fine line work, smooth shading, and solid color packing. The adjustable needle depth ranges from 0 to 4.0mm, so you have flexibility for various techniques. Whether you specialize in delicate lines, black and grey shading, or color fills, this machine adapts to your needs. You can also select a voltage between 4V and 10V for optimal power and efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis tattoo pen features an OLED digital display. At a glance, check voltage settings and battery level. The display helps you adjust easily, without pausing your work. Control the pen using three simple buttons — for starting, pausing, and setting the voltage. Everything is placed intuitively, so even beginners will find operation straightforward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInside, the Mast P20 runs on a modern Mcore motor. This motor stands out for safety, stability, and consistent performance. It produces minimal noise and vibration, creating a calm environment for both artist and client. The improved motor also reduces trauma to the skin. That means better outcomes for every tattoo, no matter the design or skin type.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Mast P20 is built for portability. Its compact, wireless build makes it a top choice for travel or mobile tattoo artists. If you visit clients or work at conventions, you will appreciate the slim size and two-battery system. Pack everything you need and create art anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis machine also boasts a stylish exterior. It is available in a range of attractive colors. Whether you want something subtle or a pen that stands out, you can match your personality and brand. The elegant appearance makes it a talking point and a smart addition to your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompared to other tattoo pens in this category, like the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Tattoo_machine\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eclassic rotary tattoo machine\u003c\/a\u003e, the Mast P20 stands out for its modern wireless design and specific focus on ergonomic comfort for women. The lightweight form, adjustable controls, and stable performance set it apart from heavier or less flexible options. The build quality and thoughtful features offer benefits for both seasoned professionals and those just starting their tattoo journey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you choose the Mast P20 Wireless Tattoo Pen Machine, you invest in quality, versatility, and comfort. Enjoy smooth sessions, professional results, and a stylish addition to your tattoo toolkit. This pen is reliable, adaptable, and made to perform in any tattoo studio setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How long does each battery last and how do I know when to charge it?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each 1000mAh battery powers the Mast P20 for 4 to 6 hours, depending on your chosen voltage and technique. The digital OLED screen lets you easily check battery status at all times. When power runs low, simply swap to your spare battery, so there's no need for forced breaks. Charge the depleted battery using the provided charger. Two-hour charge time means you are quickly ready to resume work.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I change how deep the needle goes for different styles?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can adjust needle depth from 0 to 4.0mm. This allows you to switch easily between detailed line work, shading, and color packing. Use the adjustment ring to find your preferred setting before or even during a session. This flexible feature is great for artists who do a variety of styles daily.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How long does charging take and do I get everything I need in the box?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each battery charges from empty to full in about 2 hours. The kit includes two batteries, so you always have one ready. You get a charger, the tattoo pen, and simple instructions. With two batteries, you can work without interruption—even during long appointments.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is it hard to switch batteries or set voltage on the Mast P20?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swapping batteries takes just a few seconds. The machine is built for quick, tool-free replacement. The three buttons control start, pause, and voltage adjustment. Both new and experienced artists will find it friendly and quick to use, even in the middle of a tattoo.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Who is this tattoo pen best for, and does it fit beginners?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Mast P20 suits artists at every stage—from new tattooists to skilled professionals. Lightweight, comfortable, and easy to control, it helps beginners learn and adapt quickly. The responsive motor and user-friendly display make setup simple, every time you switch styles or clients.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How long does each battery last and how do I know when to charge it?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Each 1000mAh battery powers the Mast P20 for 4 to 6 hours, depending on technique and voltage. The OLED screen shows battery status. Swap batteries anytime for continuous work.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I change how deep the needle goes for different styles?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"You can adjust needle depth from 0 to 4.0mm for a wide range of tattoo techniques including lining and shading.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How long does charging take and do I get everything I need in the box?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Each battery charges in about 2 hours. You receive two batteries, a charger, the pen, and instructions, enabling non-stop work.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is it hard to switch batteries or set voltage on the Mast P20?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Switching batteries is fast, and voltage can be set quickly using three buttons. The pen is simple for all skill levels.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Who is this tattoo pen best for, and does it fit beginners?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Mast P20 offers a lightweight, easy-to-use solution for all artists, especially those new to tattooing. Professional operators also benefit from its comfort and flexibility.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWant to see other great tattooing tools? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our personal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: tattoo, machine, wireless, pen\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"MAST TATTOO","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46976499777771,"sku":"LPNO375886474","price":83.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/51wr7spK8hL._SL1100.jpg?v=1760942299"},{"product_id":"inwerang-5mp-poe-fisheye-camera-ae45","title":"Inwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera with 360° View and Night Vision","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, No Sign Of Use, All Hardware Still Factory Sealed\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eAppears Brand New. No Signs Of Use. All Hardware Is Still Factory Sealed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera offers a stunning 360° panoramic view. It delivers unmatched coverage and night vision to protect your space around the clock. This camera fits indoor or outdoor spots, thanks to its tough build and true waterproof abilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis fisheye camera uses a strong metal housing. It has an IP66 waterproof rating, so rain or dust cannot harm it. Clear images are made possible by its 1.44mm ultra-wide-angle lens. Each frame is detailed at a crisp resolution of 2592 x 1944 pixels. Essential areas stay visible and sharp, day or night. The advanced H.265 video compression saves both storage space and bandwidth. Images look great without wasting resources.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lens is the heart of this device. Every part of your room or yard can be viewed without blind spots. Night vision reaches up to 48 feet in total darkness. This is great for driveways, stores, and large rooms. Whether you want house protection or office security, this camera captures it all clearly. The built-in microphone adds a new layer of security. Listen to any activity as it happens. This feature fits modern monitoring needs and keeps your awareness high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe motion detection system lets you set zones and tweak sensitivity. This means you only get alerts when it matters. The privacy masking feature allows up to four areas to be blocked from view. Only what matters is seen. This protects privacy without missing security.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is quick and simple using Power over Ethernet (POE). You only need one cable for both power and data. No extra wires are needed. It connects easily to POE NVRs or PoE switches. Supported models include Hikvision, LTS, and EZVIZ. After small adjustments, it also works with some Dahua or Lorex NVRs. This compatibility lets you expand your security setup with ease. The plug-and-play feature means setup does not need technical expertise. Just connect and it works.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe camera supports many web browsers. For access, try Internet Explorer, Chrome, Firefox, or Safari. Using the built-in P2P cloud feature, you can check live video in the office or on vacation. Use the free PC client or smartphone app. Just log in to check on your site at any time. This brings peace of mind and full control of your video security.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaintenance is low. The camera has user-friendly controls and easy update options. With its tough casing and reliable software, it keeps working through all seasons. This security camera fits many places. Use it at your store entrance, in your warehouse, or monitor your driveway at home. The wide field of view works well for hotels, schools, and offices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach Inwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera comes with a full one-year warranty. Dedicated technical support is just a call or email away. Our support team helps with setup, issues, and advice on best use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the Inwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera compatible with third-party NVR systems?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatibility is important for many users. This model supports a wide range of NVRs and CMS platforms you may already own. Plug-and-play works right away with some Hikvision, LTS, or EZVIZ PoE NVRs. If you use Dahua, Lorex, Uniview, TVT, or Raysharp NVRs, just enable DHCP. These models work well, too. Supporting H.265 and H.264 streams, this camera can fit into almost any existing security plan. You have freedom to expand your system over time.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this camera withstand harsh outdoor conditions?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, it is made for both indoor and outdoor use. The metal casing is solid. With an IP66 rating, this camera resists water and dust. Weather such as rain, wind, or even snow will not stop it. The design ensures reliability year-round. It fits entryways, garages, gardens, or exposed warehouse spaces.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the audio feature useful for real monitoring?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The camera includes a built-in microphone for one-way audio. This lets you hear what is happening onsite while you view video footage. Audio helps in case of emergencies or when you need proof of certain activity. For security guards and business owners, audio adds a critical level of detail.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How well does the night vision work in low-light situations?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Night surveillance is reliable. Infrared (IR) lights in the camera allow it to record clear video up to 48 feet when it’s dark. This covers parking areas, offices after hours, and home entrances. IR images are not as colorful as during the day but objects are sharp and faces or vehicles are easy to spot.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is needed for setup and ongoing use?\u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Just use a single Ethernet cable for power and video. This works with PoE switches, injectors, or direct connections to supported NVRs. No extra adapters or outlets are needed by the camera itself. For best results, we suggest a stable internet or network connection. Updates and camera checks are simple with on-screen menus.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the Inwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera compatible with third-party NVR systems?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Compatibility is important for many users. This model supports a wide range of NVRs and CMS platforms you may already own. Plug-and-play works right away with some Hikvision, LTS, or EZVIZ PoE NVRs. If you use Dahua, Lorex, Uniview, TVT, or Raysharp NVRs, just enable DHCP. These models work well, too. Supporting H.265 and H.264 streams, this camera can fit into almost any existing security plan. You have freedom to expand your system over time.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can this camera withstand harsh outdoor conditions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, it is made for both indoor and outdoor use. The metal casing is solid. With an IP66 rating, this camera resists water and dust. Weather such as rain, wind, or even snow will not stop it. The design ensures reliability year-round. It fits entryways, garages, gardens, or exposed warehouse spaces.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the audio feature useful for real monitoring?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The camera includes a built-in microphone for one-way audio. This lets you hear what is happening onsite while you view video footage. Audio helps in case of emergencies or when you need proof of certain activity. For security guards and business owners, audio adds a critical level of detail.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How well does the night vision work in low-light situations?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Night surveillance is reliable. Infrared (IR) lights in the camera allow it to record clear video up to 48 feet when it's dark. This covers parking areas, offices after hours, and home entrances. IR images are not as colorful as during the day but objects are sharp and faces or vehicles are easy to spot.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is needed for setup and ongoing use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Just use a single Ethernet cable for power and video. This works with PoE switches, injectors, or direct connections to supported NVRs. No extra adapters or outlets are needed by the camera itself. For best results, we suggest a stable internet or network connection. Updates and camera checks are simple with on-screen menus.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis Inwerang 5MP POE IP Fisheye Camera meets modern security demands. It is easy to set up, works worry-free, and new users will find it intuitive. Regular households and demanding business sites both benefit from this camera's ability to do it all. Its elegant, compact look blends well anywhere. For more on how fisheye cameras work and their science, see this \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Fisheye_lens\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eFisheye Lens Wikipedia Page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eReady to explore compatible tech? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eSee our full electronics collection here\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Inwerang, 5MP, POE, Fisheye\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Inwerang","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46978943123691,"sku":"LPNO397907334","price":53.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61bWdGiaf2L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761024922"},{"product_id":"toyota-matrix-2003-2004-android-car-stereo-41b9","title":"Toyota Matrix 2003-2004 9in CarPlay Android Auto Car Stereo 4+64GB OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Tested, Fully Functional, No Sign Of Use, Appears Brand New\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — tested, fully functional, no sign of use, and appears brand new. This unit was opened but never installed, giving you essentially a new product at an open-box price.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your 2003–2004 Toyota Matrix with a modern, feature-packed 9-inch touchscreen head unit. Designed as a direct-fit replacement for the factory radio, this stereo brings wireless Apple CarPlay and wireless Android Auto to a vehicle that never had them from the factory. An octa-core processor paired with 4 GB of RAM and 64 GB of onboard storage ensures smooth, lag-free performance whether you're navigating, streaming music, or taking hands-free calls.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBluetooth 5.0 delivers a stable, low-latency wireless connection for calls and audio. The built-in GPS navigation module works independently of your phone, so you always have a route even without a data signal. DSP (Digital Signal Processing) lets you fine-tune the audio output to match your speakers and cabin acoustics for noticeably better sound quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e9-inch HD capacitive touchscreen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWireless Apple CarPlay \u0026amp; Wireless Android Auto\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOcta-core processor — 4 GB RAM + 64 GB storage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBluetooth 5.0 for hands-free calls and audio streaming\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt-in GPS navigation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDSP audio processing for enhanced sound\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDirect-fit dash frame included for 2003–2004 Toyota Matrix\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBackup camera input supported\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e9-inch car stereo head unit with integrated dash frame\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBackup\/rear-view camera\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWiring harness and installation hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eItem is open-box; all components shown in the product listing appear present and accounted for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eScreen Size:\u003c\/strong\u003e 9 inches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRAM \/ Storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e 4 GB + 64 GB\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProcessor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Octa-core\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBluetooth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5.0\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConnectivity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wireless CarPlay, Wireless Android Auto, GPS, Bluetooth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible Vehicle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Toyota Matrix 2003–2004\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCountry of Origin:\u003c\/strong\u003e China\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a great opportunity to modernize your Matrix at a savings over new retail pricing. Tested and confirmed fully functional — buy with confidence.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Hikity","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46982029574379,"sku":"LPNO385352578","price":92.17,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71LmYDAjlGL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761115301"},{"product_id":"gopper-bathroom-exhaust-fan-led-light-c3a6","title":"Gopper 12\" Bathroom Exhaust Fan with LED Light - 141 CFM, Ultra Quiet 1.0 Sone","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eAppears brand new, all parts included, factory sealed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your bathroom air quality and lighting with the Gopper 12\" Bathroom Exhaust Fan with LED Light. This sleek fan clears out humidity and odors, keeping your bathroom fresh. Its ultra-quiet 1.0 sone operation ensures peace while you enjoy consistent, bright LED illumination. Perfect for daily use, this fan-light combo is a simple way to boost comfort in any bathroom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis bathroom exhaust fan features a powerful 141 CFM rating. It handles bathrooms up to 100 square feet efficiently. High airflow means steam and odor disappear fast, reducing mirror fog and preventing moisture buildup. The result is a cleaner, healthier room for your family or guests at all times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe modern white grille and integrated LED light suit any decor style. The 6500K daylight LED gives clear, cool light ideal for tasks like shaving or makeup. The sealed LED means you won't need to replace bulbs often. Rated for 30,000+ hours, it offers long-lasting, maintenance-free performance. The LED is non-dimmable to keep the lighting even and reliable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is hassle-free. The fan fits a standard 10\" x 10\" mounting hole and a 4\" duct. All hardware and a simple user guide are provided in the box. Built to last, the Gopper features 18-gauge wiring and anti-corrosion connectors which stay reliable even in damp bathrooms. This fan is an ideal upgrade for remodels or new construction, in homes or offices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eQuiet operation is a highlight of this model. With a 1.0 sone sound rating, the fan is quieter than most household appliances. Many users compare its noise to gentle rustling leaves. This makes it perfect for early morning or late night use, when quiet is most appreciated. Choose the Gopper for less noise and more relaxation in your bathroom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhy choose the Gopper 12\" Bathroom Exhaust Fan with LED Light? You get top-tier performance, robust ventilation, and bright energy-saving lighting, all in one. This fan is designed with safety and convenience in mind. Its materials resist corrosion and heat, providing safe operation for years. Enhance the value and comfort of any bathroom with this trusted fan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the airflow capacity of the Gopper 12\" Bathroom Exhaust Fan?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This fan offers an airflow of 141 CFM. It is well-suited for quickly removing humidity and odor in bathrooms up to about 100 square feet. Larger rooms may not clear as fast, so pairing units could help in those situations. The powerful motor ensures air moves efficiently for a fresher, drier bath space daily.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How quiet is the fan during operation?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The fan is rated at only 1.0 sone. This is quieter than normal conversation and blends into background noise. Many users report barely noticing when it's on. This makes it a great choice for bathrooms near bedrooms or when noise is a concern, like during early morning routines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the LED light dimmable?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The LED light in this unit is not dimmable. It is designed to provide a constant 6500K daylight color. This level of brightness supports clearly lit grooming and cleaning. If you need different light levels, consider using a separate dimmable fixture in your room.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the installation requirements for this fan?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Gopper fan needs a 10\" x 10\" ceiling opening and a 4\" duct connection. These are standard in many homes. The package comes with all mounting hardware and a detailed installation guide. Anyone with basic DIY skills can install it, but professional help is always recommended for wiring and duct work. A snug, airtight fit guarantees best results and quiet operation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How long will the LED light last?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The sealed LED light in this fan has an expected lifespan of over 30,000 hours. That is nearly three and a half years if left on non-stop, but most users will get over a decade of use. The design helps avoid frequent bulb changes. The sealed module also keeps out moisture, reducing the risk of short circuits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about bathroom exhaust fan technology by visiting the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Bathroom_extractor_fan\"\u003eWikipedia page on bathroom extractor fans\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\"\u003eExplore our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: bathroom, exhaust, fan, light\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Gopper","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46998201762027,"sku":"LPNO392331744","price":68.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/619ePOXTY2L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761621146"},{"product_id":"hisafe-commercial-passage-lever-63c5","title":"HISAFE Heavy Duty Commercial Passage Door Lever – Satin Chrome Finish, Non-Locking Grade 2 Handle, UL 3-Hour Fire Rated, Ergonomic Lever for Schools and Hotels, 70mm Latch","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eLike New, All Pieces Included\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade any commercial doorway with the HISAFE Heavy Duty Commercial Passage Door Lever. This lever features a satin chrome finish, Grade 2 durability, and a non-locking, ergonomic design. Its UL 3-hour fire rated build increases safety for high-traffic spaces like schools, hotels, and office corridors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis door lever is crafted from premium, high-strength metal. The satin chrome finish protects against rust, scratches, and everyday wear. Its smooth surface makes cleaning easy and keeps its look fresh. The handle is ergonomically shaped to promote comfort and ease of use for everyone. It fulfills ADA requirements, so it's accessible for all users.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHISAFE designed this lever for straightforward, quick installation. The non-handed style means you can use it on both left or right-handed doors. Fits door thicknesses from 1-3\/8 inches up to 1-3\/4 inches. It includes a standard 70mm (2-3\/4 inch) backset latch, suited for many commercial doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis lever is ideal for environments with frequent usage. It stands up to constant opening and closing. You’ll typically see this type of handle in schools, hotels, and high-traffic office settings. The finish matches a variety of décor, adding a refined touch without clashing with existing hardware. The Grade 2 rating meets ANSI\/BHMA 156.2 standards, signifying solid construction and long-term durability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlong with strength, this passage lever is fire tested and UL 3-hour rated. That means the hardware can help hold smoke and fire back in emergencies. The rating gives building owners confidence in meeting fire safety codes and keeping people safer. Combined with the non-locking functionality, it's perfect for halls, closets, and non-private rooms that need secure, open access in public spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose HISAFE and enjoy quality engineering in every detail. Each lever is built for the specific needs of public and commercial properties. The easy-to-grip design benefits all users, from young children to seniors and those with limited mobility. This attention to detail supports not only daily use but also overall facility safety and compliance expectations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis model’s features help lower maintenance costs over time. Thanks to its durable construction and smart engineering, you’ll spend less on replacements and repairs. If you’re upgrading an older building or outfitting a new space, this lever meets both style and safety requirements at once.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more info about fire door safety, see the official \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Fire_door\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eFire Door\u003c\/a\u003e entry on Wikipedia. For matching finishes or more grade 2 hardware options, visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003epersonal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What door thicknesses can this passage lever fit?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This HISAFE lever fits most standard commercial doors. It works for doors 1-3\/8 inches to 1-3\/4 inches thick. That includes most school, office, and hospitality doors. The included adjustable latch ensures compatibility with a wide range of doors in these environments.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this lever be used on both right and left-handed doors?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the lever is non-handed. That means you don’t have to worry about door swing or orientation. It installs easily on either left or right-handed doors, minimizing confusion and speeding up installation time for contractors or maintenance teams.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the HISAFE Passage Door Lever fire-rated for emergency use?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this model carries a UL 3-hour fire rating. It will help contain fire and smoke, protecting building occupants longer in an emergency. This UL rating is important in commercial spaces where fire code compliance is mandatory. It delivers both peace of mind and regulatory assurance.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does this handle meet accessibility or ADA requirements?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Absolutely. The lever's design is ergonomically friendly and meets ADA specifications. This means users with disabilities, limited hand strength, or dexterity challenges will be able to open doors comfortably. ADA compliance also helps property owners avoid legal complications and increases public access.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the satin chrome finish benefit my facility?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Satin chrome offers a bright but low-gloss sheen. It pairs well with modern and classic interiors. The finish is also resistant to fingerprints, scratches, and corrosion, meaning your hardware will look newer for longer and require less maintenance over time.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What door thicknesses can this passage lever fit?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This HISAFE lever fits most standard commercial doors. It works for doors 1-3\/8 inches to 1-3\/4 inches thick. That includes most school, office, and hospitality doors. The included adjustable latch ensures compatibility with a wide range of doors in these environments.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can this lever be used on both right and left-handed doors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, the lever is non-handed. That means you don’t have to worry about door swing or orientation. It installs easily on either left or right-handed doors, minimizing confusion and speeding up installation time for contractors or maintenance teams.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the HISAFE Passage Door Lever fire-rated for emergency use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, this model carries a UL 3-hour fire rating. It will help contain fire and smoke, protecting building occupants longer in an emergency. This UL rating is important in commercial spaces where fire code compliance is mandatory. It delivers both peace of mind and regulatory assurance.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does this handle meet accessibility or ADA requirements?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely. The lever's design is ergonomically friendly and meets ADA specifications. This means users with disabilities, limited hand strength, or dexterity challenges will be able to open doors comfortably. ADA compliance also helps property owners avoid legal complications and increases public access.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the satin chrome finish benefit my facility?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Satin chrome offers a bright but low-gloss sheen. It pairs well with modern and classic interiors. The finish is also resistant to fingerprints, scratches, and corrosion, meaning your hardware will look newer for longer and require less maintenance over time.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who need robust, easy-to-use, commercial-grade hardware, the HISAFE Heavy Duty Commercial Passage Door Lever leads the way. It joins safety, accessibility, and sophisticated design without extra hassle. Ideal for upgrades or new commercial fit-outs, it can refresh or secure nearly any commercial space while keeping a modern look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFind peace of mind and superior functionality with HISAFE. This passage door lever unites the strength you need, the accessibility you want, and a timeless satin chrome finish. See why HISAFE is a top pick for project managers and building owners everywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: HISAFE, door, commercial, lever\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"HISAFE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":46998249603307,"sku":"LPNO373653029","price":53.09,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/51rPxYJXWVL._AC_SL1474.jpg?v=1761623217"},{"product_id":"briidea-amp-spa-panel-a3f3","title":"Briidea 60 Amp Spa Panel with 2-Pole 60 Amp GFCI Breaker - IP65 Waterproof for S","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Dent On Bottom Of Box, Does Not Effect Use, Just Cosmetic, Otherwise Like New\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New.\u003cbr\u003eBox has a dent at the bottom. It is cosmetic and will not impact use. The product itself is like new and fully functional.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Briidea 60 Amp Spa Panel with 2-Pole 60 Amp GFCI Breaker gives safety, reliability, and power for hot tubs, pools, and spas. Its waterproof and durable build works indoors and outdoors. This spa panel is essential for anyone wanting robust power and dependable protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis panel stands out for its IP65 waterproof rating, which means it resists strong water jets and dust. Weather is not a problem. It keeps critical electrical components dry, no matter rain or sprinklers. Use it in your backyard, near the pool, or wherever wet conditions exist. The rust-proof and corrosion-resistant finish promises a long life, even in harsh weather. You save time and money in the long run due to fewer repairs and replacements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSafety comes first with pools and spas, and the GFCI technology here is crucial. The two-pole, 60-amp GFCI breaker quickly detects ground faults. If an abnormality occurs, it cuts power in moments. This helps avoid electrical shock and damage. You and your family can relax or play worry-free. The breaker is made for heavy use and manages large electric loads for pool pumps, heaters, or large spa setups. Simple protection can go a long way toward peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstalling the Briidea spa panel is much easier than many alternatives. It has clear markings, waterproof knockouts, and a simple wiring diagram. Even if you’re new to electrical work, setup is straightforward. Wire management is tidy, with only the switch exposed. No clutter interrupts your yard's appearance. For professionals, it speeds up jobs. For DIY users, steps are clear and hassle-free, although it’s smart to consult a licensed electrician for complicated installs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis versatile panel supports many models and brands. Use it for small backyard tubs, midsize spas, or larger home pools. Most modern spa and pool systems work with this unit. Always double-check what your specific equipment needs before buying. If you are unsure, look for help from an electrician. The panel fits into new builds and upgrades, integrating with most standard outdoor electrical systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEvery detail in the Briidea design is chosen for convenience and safety. Its compact body is light and easy to move during installation. The sturdy shell withstands sunshine, humidity, or freezing temperatures. Step-by-step directions let beginners and experts install with confidence. Clear instructions, labels, and a secure cover make troubleshooting simpler in the future. Less time fixing equals more time enjoying your spa or pool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis spa panel also provides solid value. You cut down on repairs thanks to the strong protection. If you want an upgrade, it’s a smart investment. You do not have to sacrifice safety for cost. For people who need to keep energy use steady under big loads, this is a practical, efficient choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpa Panel FAQs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this panel compatible with my hot tub or pool?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Briidea 60 Amp Spa Panel fits many brands and sizes. It works for most home spas, hot tubs, and many pools. It is important to check your equipment's power needs. If your tub or pool needs 60-amp protection and has standard wiring, this panel is likely suitable. Because every system is slightly different, you may want to show the manual or panel specs to an electrician. They can verify full compatibility before you install. This ensures safe long-term use.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the IP65 rating help for outdoor use?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The IP65 rating protects against strong water spray and total dust entry. This matters because pools and spas often operate outdoors. With IP65, heavy rain will not reach the internal wiring. Wind-blown dust also cannot get inside. As a result, the panel is less likely to short-circuit or rust away. Your electrical system will last longer, and you do not have to fix or replace the system as often. Outdoor life will be easier.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install the Briidea Spa Panel on my own?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Many handy homeowners like to do their own spa panel setup. This Briidea panel comes with clear diagrams, waterproof outlets, and a safe shell. For people comfortable with electrical work, these features make it easier. However, working with 60-amp systems can be dangerous if errors happen. If you have never handled pool or spa wiring before, talk to a licensed electrician. Getting professional help guarantees the system will meet safety codes and protect everyone. Even skilled DIY users will often choose professional installation for peace of mind.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the maintenance steps after installation?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e After installation, check the panel cover and seals every few months. Clean off dust, spider webs, and leaves near the housing. Make sure the knockouts and protective seals remain in place. Use the test button on the GFCI breaker monthly. This makes sure the breaker will trip quickly if needed. If you spot any broken seals or corrosion, call for an inspection. Little checks help keep your panel reliable and your pool safe season after season.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this panel compatible with my hot tub or pool?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Briidea 60 Amp Spa Panel fits many brands and sizes. It works for most home spas, hot tubs, and many pools. It is important to check your equipment's power needs. If your tub or pool needs 60-amp protection and has standard wiring, this panel is likely suitable. Because every system is slightly different, you may want to show the manual or panel specs to an electrician. They can verify full compatibility before you install. This ensures safe long-term use.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the IP65 rating help for outdoor use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The IP65 rating protects against strong water spray and total dust entry. This matters because pools and spas often operate outdoors. With IP65, heavy rain will not reach the internal wiring. Wind-blown dust also cannot get inside. As a result, the panel is less likely to short-circuit or rust away. Your electrical system will last longer, and you do not have to fix or replace the system as often. Outdoor life will be easier.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I install the Briidea Spa Panel on my own?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Many handy homeowners like to do their own spa panel setup. This Briidea panel comes with clear diagrams, waterproof outlets, and a safe shell. For people comfortable with electrical work, these features make it easier. However, working with 60-amp systems can be dangerous if errors happen. If you have never handled pool or spa wiring before, talk to a licensed electrician. Getting professional help guarantees the system will meet safety codes and protect everyone. Even skilled DIY users will often choose professional installation for peace of mind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What are the maintenance steps after installation?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"After installation, check the panel cover and seals every few months. Clean off dust, spider webs, and leaves near the housing. Make sure the knockouts and protective seals remain in place. Use the test button on the GFCI breaker monthly. This makes sure the breaker will trip quickly if needed. If you spot any broken seals or corrosion, call for an inspection. Little checks help keep your panel reliable and your pool safe season after season.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Briidea 60 Amp Spa Panel with GFCI breaker is a trusted, weather-resistant, and powerful spa panel solution. You can stay safe, stay efficient, and worry less about your equipment. Read more about \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/GFCI\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eGFCI technology\u003c\/a\u003e for safety details. Upgrade or maintain your backyard setup with another visit to our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003epersonal-care collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: spa, panel, GFCI, waterproof.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"briidea","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003178303723,"sku":"LPNO348731704","price":71.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61YKB5Vk2xL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761703740"},{"product_id":"inefala-android-car-stereo-dodge-durango-dc18","title":"[2+64GB] Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo for Dodge Durango 2014-2020 with Wireless CarPlay \u0026 Android Auto","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tested, Working Condition, Like New, All Parts Included\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your driving experience with the Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo, specifically designed for Dodge Durango models from 2014 to 2020. This advanced system combines cutting-edge technology with user-friendly features to transform your vehicle's infotainment capabilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe centerpiece of this unit is its 9-inch high-definition capacitive touchscreen, offering a resolution of 1280x720 pixels. This ensures crisp visuals and responsive touch controls, making navigation through menus and applications seamless. The large display enhances visibility, allowing drivers to access information at a glance without distraction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the hood, the stereo is powered by an Octa-core processor paired with 2GB of RAM and 64GB of internal storage. This robust configuration ensures smooth operation, quick app launches, and ample space for storing your favorite apps, music, and videos. The Android 15 operating system provides a familiar interface with access to a vast array of applications via the Google Play Store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConnectivity is a standout feature of this system. It supports both wireless and wired Apple CarPlay and Android Auto, enabling seamless integration with your smartphone. This allows for hands-free calling, messaging, navigation, and access to your music library directly from the touchscreen. The Mirror Link feature further extends compatibility, allowing you to mirror your smartphone's display onto the stereo screen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor navigation, the built-in GPS module comes pre-installed with offline maps for North America. When connected to Wi-Fi, you can access real-time traffic updates and additional features through online navigation services. The GPS antenna should be installed in a location with an unobstructed view of the sky to ensure optimal signal reception.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAudio enthusiasts will appreciate the HiFi function and customizable equalizer settings. The integrated HiFi audio capabilities deliver high-fidelity sound reproduction, while the 32-band EQ allows you to tailor the audio output to your preferences. Whether you're listening to music, podcasts, or audiobooks, the sound quality is immersive and adjustable to suit various genres and listening environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe system also includes an FM\/RDS radio receiver with 30 preset stations, enabling you to stay updated with news, weather, and entertainment. The automotive-grade chipset ensures stable signal reception, and the RDS (Radio Data System) provides additional information such as station names and song titles where available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSafety features are integral to this unit. The included AHD rearview camera offers a 170° ultra-wide field of view and excellent night vision capabilities. When the vehicle is shifted into reverse, the camera feed automatically displays on the touchscreen, assisting with parking and maneuvering. Proper installation and wiring are essential for optimal performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSteering wheel control (SWC) integration allows you to manage functions such as volume adjustment, song selection, and call handling without taking your hands off the wheel. Configuration may be required through the stereo's settings menu to ensure compatibility with your vehicle's existing controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional features include dual USB ports and RCA harnesses for connecting various audio and video devices, support for an external microphone to enhance voice clarity during calls, and compatibility with a range of multimedia formats. The system's user interface offers 24 customizable themes, allowing you to personalize the appearance to match your style.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this stereo compatible with all Dodge Durango models from 2014 to 2020?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo is designed specifically for Dodge Durango models produced between 2014 and 2020. It is essential to verify that your vehicle's central control panel matches the compatibility requirements outlined in the product documentation to ensure a proper fit and function.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install this stereo system myself, or do I need professional assistance?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e While the package includes all necessary components and an instruction manual for installation, professional installation is recommended. This ensures that all connections are correctly made, the system is securely mounted, and all features function as intended. Professional installers can also address any vehicle-specific challenges that may arise during the process.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the system support both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. This flexibility allows you to choose the connection method that best suits your preferences and ensures seamless integration with your smartphone for accessing apps, navigation, and media.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I update the offline maps on the GPS navigation system?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To update the offline maps, connect the stereo to a Wi-Fi network and access the navigation app's settings. Look for the option to download or update maps. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the latest map data. Regular updates ensure accurate navigation and access to new routes and points of interest.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What should I do if the steering wheel controls are not functioning after installation?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e If the steering wheel controls are not working, first ensure that all wiring connections, particularly those related to the CANBUS or SWC, are correctly made. Next, access the stereo's settings menu to perform the SWC learning process, which maps the steering wheel buttons to the corresponding functions on the stereo. If issues persist, consult the instruction manual or contact customer support for further assistance.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this stereo compatible with all Dodge Durango models from 2014 to 2020?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo is designed specifically for Dodge Durango models produced between 2014 and 2020. It is essential to verify that your vehicle's central control panel matches the compatibility requirements outlined in the product documentation to ensure a proper fit and function.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I install this stereo system myself, or do I need professional assistance?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"While the package includes all necessary components and an instruction manual for installation, professional installation is recommended. This ensures that all connections are correctly made, the system is securely mounted, and all features function as intended. Professional installers can also address any vehicle-specific challenges that may arise during the process.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the system support both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, the Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. This flexibility allows you to choose the connection method that best suits your preferences and ensures seamless integration with your smartphone for accessing apps, navigation, and media.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I update the offline maps on the GPS navigation system?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To update the offline maps, connect the stereo to a Wi-Fi network and access the navigation app's settings. Look for the option to download or update maps. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the latest map data. Regular updates ensure accurate navigation and access to new routes and points of interest.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What should I do if the steering wheel controls are not functioning after installation?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"If the steering wheel controls are not working, first ensure that all wiring connections, particularly those related to the CANBUS or SWC, are correctly made. Next, access the stereo's settings menu to perform the SWC learning process, which maps the steering wheel buttons to the corresponding functions on the stereo. If issues persist, consult the instruction manual or contact customer support for further assistance.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Inefala Android 15 Car Radio Stereo offers a comprehensive upgrade for Dodge Durango owners seeking enhanced connectivity, navigation, and audio features. Its combination of a high-definition touchscreen, powerful hardware, and extensive compatibility makes it a valuable addition to your vehicle's infotainment system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information on installation and compatibility, refer to the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/manuals.plus\/asin\/B0D7ZP2BNY\"\u003eInefala Android 15 Car Stereo User Manual\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Inefala, Android 15, Car Stereo, Dodge Durango\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Inefala","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003400569067,"sku":"LPNO393685431","price":94.04,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71Hl_8xuD0L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761707207"},{"product_id":"elyona-hammered-pendant-lights-5359","title":"ELYONA 2 Pack Hammered Pendant Light Fixtures – Elegant 10.2” Metal \u0026 Rubber Woo","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background: #111; color: #e5ca9f; padding: 12px 14px; border-radius: 8px; font-family: monospace; font-size: 14px; margin: 0 0 16px 0;\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Appears Brand New, Still In Factory Packaging\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eAppears brand new in factory packaging\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your home style with the ELYONA 2 Pack Hammered Pendant Light Fixtures. These 10.2-inch hammered pendant lights mix metal and rubber wood for a fresh, modern look. They fit kitchens, farmhouse bars, bedrooms, and dining rooms. The blend of organic and industrial materials offers a warm, elegant ambiance for any space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach fixture uses a carefully crafted hammered metal shade, shaped for unique beauty and deep texture. This shade is made with precise Japanese techniques, making the pattern stand out. The hammered finish helps scatter light, giving off a soft, inviting glow. It is ideal for modern, rustic, or farmhouse-style decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rubber wood top adds a natural touch, creating a nice contrast with the metal. This wood is sourced and selected for its durability and strength. Each piece shows the wood grain, which is unique to every lamp. It adds organic warmth to your décor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese pendant lights offer adjustable height. You can extend the cable up to 54.5 inches or keep it shorter as needed. The shades measure 10 inches wide and deep, providing balanced lighting for tables or kitchen islands. The round, 4.3-inch ceiling canopy keeps installation stable and secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe fixtures work with LED, CFL, Edison, and other E26-base bulbs up to 40W. If adjustable lighting is important, you can use dimmable bulbs with a compatible dimmer switch. This lets you choose from bright task lighting to a softer, cozy glow for evenings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaintenance is simple. Wipe the wood pieces with a damp cloth, then dry. To keep the wood at its best, apply mineral or olive oil every 1-2 months. This simple step deepens the wood’s texture and protects its surface. Regular care ensures your pendant lights look beautiful for years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eELYONA is dedicated to quality and high standards. Their team has over 20 years of lighting design experience. Their products go through strict tests, ensuring your new pendant lights are reliable and safe. The fixtures are ETL listed, showing they meet US safety standards. Each purchase includes a one-year warranty for extra peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese pendant light fixtures are versatile additions to many areas. Hang them over a kitchen island for a practical, stylish focus. Use them in a farmhouse bar to add a welcoming touch. They fit well in dining rooms or bedrooms, adding elegance and cozy light wherever you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want a modern lighting upgrade, the ELYONA pendant lights are a smart, timeless choice. Their combination of hammered metal and natural wood suits both trendy and traditional spaces. The adjustable height allows flexible placement for small and large rooms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing quality pendant lighting not only elevates a room’s look but also boosts its function and mood. These lights bring together elegance, practicality, and simple care. Unique design and trusted safety make them stand out from ordinary fixtures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo discover more about the history of pendant lights and their use in modern interiors, visit the \u003ca href='\\\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Pendant_light\\\"'\u003eWikipedia article on pendant lights\u003c\/a\u003e. Explore our \u003ca href='\\\"\/collections\/home\\\"'\u003ehome lighting collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more inspiration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What sizes and installation options do these pendant lights offer?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The ELYONA pendant lights feature a maximum adjustable height of 54.5 inches. The shades measure 10 inches wide and deep. You can hang them low over a bar or higher for general lighting. The adjustable cable makes them fit many different spaces and ceiling styles, whether flat or sloped. The round ceiling canopy offers stability and easy installation for most ceilings. Multiple fixtures can be hung at different heights to create visual interest over a kitchen island or dining table.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What types of bulbs are compatible with these pendant light fixtures, and are they dimmable?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These lights accept many bulbs, including LED, CFL, and Edison bulbs. Each fixture uses E26-base bulbs, with a maximum rating of 40 watts. For varied brightness, choose dimmable bulbs and combine them with a compatible wall dimmer switch. This provides flexible lighting, from bright for tasks to soft for ambiance. Using quality bulbs ensures long-lasting, energy-efficient lighting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do you properly care for and maintain the natural rubber wood in these pendant lights?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Caring for the wood parts is simple. Wipe with a damp, soft cloth to remove dust, then dry right away. Every 1-2 months, applying mineral or olive oil can bring out the wood’s rich grain and help protect the finish. This keeps the wood smooth and looking fresh. Avoid harsh chemicals or soaking the wood, as moisture can damage the grain or surface over time. Regular upkeep ensures these lights stay beautiful and functional for years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBring ELYONA’s hammered pendant lights into your home for modern lighting that’s stylish, adjustable, and easy to care for. These \u003cstrong\u003ependant\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003elighting\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003emetal\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003ewood\u003c\/strong\u003e elements combine for a timeless, elegant addition to any space.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"ELYONA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003412168939,"sku":"LPNO393755803","price":69.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61Us27pHw4L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761707774"},{"product_id":"yqable-12v-starter-motor-21163-0751-e395","title":"YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor 21163-0751 for Kawasaki Mule Pro-FX\/FXT\/FXR","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Grade A+, No scuffs, No dirt, Appears to be brand new\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Grade A+. No scuffs. No dirt. Appears brand new.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor 21163-0751 offers top performance for your Kawasaki Mule. This high-quality starter motor fits Pro-FX, Pro-FXT, and Pro-FXR models from 2015-2020. Enjoy fast engine starts every time. Its modern design gives you reliable power and improved durability. Choose this starter for dependable use in many conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReliable power, every start, every day.\u003c\/strong\u003e Start your vehicle confidently, even in cold or wet weather. The YQABLE starter uses a sturdy 9-tooth pinion and supplies 8 NM of torque, which is ideal for quick cranking. Every drive benefits from stable starting and extended service life. The motor’s tough construction resists mud, water, and harsh environments. Whether on the job or on the trail, depend on this starter for consistent performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis starter motor is engineered to meet or exceed Kawasaki’s original factory standards. It directly replaces part number 21163-0751, so there’s no need to worry about fit or compatibility. Installation is simple and requires only basic tools. Even new DIYers can quickly get their Mule running again with minimal hassle. For added convenience, visit our \u003ca href='\\\"\/collections\/automotive\\\"'\u003eAutomotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e to find more parts that fit your exact needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor stands out for its quality and value. Premium materials and careful engineering guarantee smooth engagement and quiet operation. Internal components are designed for heavy-duty use. The result is longer life and fewer repairs. Save money and reduce downtime by choosing this trusted aftermarket part. Many Mule owners trust it to keep their vehicles in top shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis starter motor is the smart choice for restoring your Mule’s reliability. If your vehicle cranks slowly or refuses to start, this is a cost-effective upgrade. The starter empowers your Mule for both daily tasks and tough work jobs. Regular replacement of worn parts helps prevent future problems and costly breakdowns.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNeed help with your install? The starter comes with user-friendly instructions. Most owners can finish the swap in under an hour using tools found at home. If you have unique installation needs or questions, a professional mechanic can help ensure peak performance and peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConcerned about warranty? Warranty coverage varies, but most sellers offer basic protection against defects. We recommend checking with your retailer. Proper care and routine inspections will also extend your starter’s life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about starter motors and their role in vehicles at \u003ca href='\\\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Starter_motor\\\"' target='\\\"_blank\\\"' rel='\\\"noopener\\\"'\u003eWikipedia’s Starter Motor page\u003c\/a\u003e. It provides helpful context and details about how these parts support reliable engine function.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor compatible with my Mule?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This starter motor fits Kawasaki Mule Pro-FX, Pro-FXT, and Pro-FXR models, years 2015-2020. If you own a Pro-FX from 2017 or a Pro-FXT from 2016, this part matches your needs. For other models, check your owner's manual or part number. Always confirm your model and year to be sure.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How hard is it to install this starter motor?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Most installations take less than an hour with standard tools. The part is a direct replacement, so you won’t need special adapters. Beginners can usually complete the work by following the instructions. If you feel unsure, get assistance from a mechanic for a trouble-free experience. Good installation ensures proper function and safety.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What can I expect in terms of warranty and support?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Warranty policies are provided by the seller or manufacturer and may include coverage for defects. Check with your retailer before buying for exact terms. Routine inspections and maintenance help you get the best results. If you have warranty concerns, keep your proof of purchase on hand. Good warranty support helps you shop with confidence.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Why should I choose this starter motor over other brands?\n        \u003cbr\u003e\n        \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor is made with top-grade materials. It offers a precise fit for select Kawasaki Mule models. Many users report reliable starts and long service with this product. Its robust design performs well in mud, rain, and rough terrain. Count on great value and dependable operation every day.\n    \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor compatible with my Mule?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This starter motor fits Kawasaki Mule Pro-FX, Pro-FXT, and Pro-FXR models, years 2015-2020. If you own a Pro-FX from 2017 or a Pro-FXT from 2016, this part matches your needs. For other models, check your owner's manual or part number. Always confirm your model and year to be sure.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How hard is it to install this starter motor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Most installations take less than an hour with standard tools. The part is a direct replacement, so you won’t need special adapters. Beginners can usually complete the work by following the instructions. If you feel unsure, get assistance from a mechanic for a trouble-free experience. Good installation ensures proper function and safety.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What can I expect in terms of warranty and support?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Warranty policies are provided by the seller or manufacturer and may include coverage for defects. Check with your retailer before buying for exact terms. Routine inspections and maintenance help you get the best results. If you have warranty concerns, keep your proof of purchase on hand. Good warranty support helps you shop with confidence.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Why should I choose this starter motor over other brands?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor is made with top-grade materials. It offers a precise fit for select Kawasaki Mule models. Many users report reliable starts and long service with this product. Its robust design performs well in mud, rain, and rough terrain. Count on great value and dependable operation every day.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your vehicle with the YQABLE 12V 9T Starter Motor 21163-0751. Benefit from easy installation, a direct fit, and trusted durability. This \u003cstrong\u003estarter\u003c\/strong\u003e motor is perfect for \u003cstrong\u003eautomotive\u003c\/strong\u003e needs and is ideal for your \u003cstrong\u003eKawasaki\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eMule\u003c\/strong\u003e. Find more top-rated parts in our \u003ca href='\\\"\/collections\/automotive\\\"'\u003eAutomotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Keywords: starter, Kawasaki, Mule, automotive.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"YQABLE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003574763755,"sku":"LPNO387014452","price":55.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61xe4kmIyyL._SL1500.jpg?v=1761712537"},{"product_id":"car-stereo-toyota-corolla-c1bc","title":"Car Stereo for Toyota Corolla E120 E130 2000-2006 [2+64G] Android Car Radio with Wireless CarPlay\/Android Auto, 7\" Touch Screen GPS WiFi Bluetooth FM\/RDS Mirror Link SWC + Backup Camera","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eLike New, Tested, Working Condition, All Parts Included\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your driving experience with this advanced Android car stereo, specifically designed for Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models from 2000 to 2006. Featuring a 7-inch touch screen, wireless CarPlay and Android Auto, GPS navigation, WiFi, Bluetooth, FM\/RDS radio, mirror link, steering wheel control compatibility, and an included backup camera, this system offers a comprehensive multimedia solution for your vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 7-inch touch screen provides a vibrant and responsive interface, allowing you to easily navigate through menus, adjust settings, and access various applications. The high-resolution display ensures clear visibility, enhancing your overall user experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith wireless CarPlay and Android Auto support, you can seamlessly integrate your smartphone with the car stereo. This feature enables you to make calls, send and receive messages, use navigation apps, and listen to your favorite music, all while keeping your hands on the wheel and eyes on the road.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe built-in GPS navigation system ensures you never lose your way. With accurate and up-to-date maps, you can confidently travel to your destination without relying on your smartphone. The WiFi connectivity allows you to download additional apps and updates, keeping your system current and versatile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBluetooth functionality enables hands-free calling and wireless music streaming, providing convenience and safety during your drives. The FM\/RDS radio offers a wide range of stations to choose from, ensuring you have access to your favorite broadcasts wherever you go.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe mirror link feature allows you to project your smartphone's screen onto the car stereo display, providing access to your phone's apps and content directly from the touch screen. This is particularly useful for accessing navigation apps, media, and more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSteering wheel control compatibility ensures that you can adjust volume, change tracks, and manage calls without taking your hands off the wheel. This integration maintains the safety and convenience of your driving experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included backup camera enhances your parking and reversing capabilities. With a clear view of the area behind your vehicle, you can maneuver with confidence, reducing the risk of accidents and ensuring the safety of pedestrians and other vehicles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is straightforward, with a design tailored to fit Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models from 2000 to 2006. The package includes all necessary cables and accessories, making the setup process as smooth as possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, this Android car stereo offers a comprehensive upgrade for your Toyota Corolla, combining modern technology with user-friendly features to enhance your driving experience. From seamless smartphone integration to advanced navigation and safety features, this system is designed to meet all your in-car entertainment and communication needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this car stereo compatible with all Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models from 2000 to 2006?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This car stereo is specifically designed to fit Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models produced between 2000 and 2006. However, it's important to verify the dimensions and specifications of your vehicle's dashboard to ensure a proper fit. If your vehicle has a factory-installed amplifier or other unique features, additional adapters or wiring harnesses may be required for installation.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the system support both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this car stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto. This flexibility allows you to choose the connection method that best suits your preferences and ensures seamless integration with your smartphone.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is included in the package?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The package includes the 7-inch Android car stereo unit, a backup camera, all necessary wiring harnesses, installation accessories, and a user manual. This comprehensive set ensures you have everything needed for a successful installation.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install this car stereo myself, or do I need professional assistance?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e While the car stereo is designed for straightforward installation, the complexity can vary depending on your vehicle's existing wiring and features. If you have experience with car audio installations, you may be able to install it yourself. However, for optimal performance and to ensure all features function correctly, professional installation is recommended.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the backup camera function automatically when the vehicle is in reverse?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the backup camera is designed to activate automatically when the vehicle is shifted into reverse gear. This feature provides a clear view of the area behind your vehicle, assisting with parking and reversing maneuvers.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this car stereo compatible with all Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models from 2000 to 2006?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This car stereo is specifically designed to fit Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models produced between 2000 and 2006. However, it's important to verify the dimensions and specifications of your vehicle's dashboard to ensure a proper fit. If your vehicle has a factory-installed amplifier or other unique features, additional adapters or wiring harnesses may be required for installation.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the system support both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, this car stereo supports both wireless and wired connections for CarPlay and Android Auto. This flexibility allows you to choose the connection method that best suits your preferences and ensures seamless integration with your smartphone.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is included in the package?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The package includes the 7-inch Android car stereo unit, a backup camera, all necessary wiring harnesses, installation accessories, and a user manual. This comprehensive set ensures you have everything needed for a successful installation.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I install this car stereo myself, or do I need professional assistance?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"While the car stereo is designed for straightforward installation, the complexity can vary depending on your vehicle's existing wiring and features. If you have experience with car audio installations, you may be able to install it yourself. However, for optimal performance and to ensure all features function correctly, professional installation is recommended.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the backup camera function automatically when the vehicle is in reverse?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, the backup camera is designed to activate automatically when the vehicle is shifted into reverse gear. This feature provides a clear view of the area behind your vehicle, assisting with parking and reversing maneuvers.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your driving experience with this feature-rich Android car stereo, tailored for Toyota Corolla E120 and E130 models from 2000 to 2006. With its combination of advanced technology, user-friendly interface, and comprehensive features, this system is an excellent investment for those seeking to upgrade their in-car entertainment and navigation capabilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information on car stereo systems and their features, you can visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Car_audio\"\u003eCar Audio Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our electronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: car, stereo, Toyota, Corolla\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"METEESER","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003686174955,"sku":"LPNO387014223","price":89.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71imxcI4fIL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761715990"},{"product_id":"dasbecan-led-tail-lights-ram-8297","title":"Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly for RAM 1500 2013-2018, RAM 2500 \u0026 3500 2014-2018 - Driver Side with Bulbs","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Grade A+ Brand New, Factory Sealed\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your RAM 1500, 2500, or 3500 today with the Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly. This durable, high-visibility driver-side light improves safety with strong, high-intensity LEDs. The plug-and-play design ensures quick installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDrive with confidence and style. The Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly fits RAM 1500 models from 2013 to 2018, and RAM 2500 \u0026amp; 3500 models from 2014 to 2018. It uses bright LEDs to ensure you are seen, even at night or in harsh weather. Sturdy materials mean this tail light lasts through daily driving and long journeys.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach assembly combines a tough ABS plastic housing and a clear polycarbonate lens. This combo keeps the tail light safe from scratches and UV rays. The materials resist impacts and stay clear for years. Installation is simple, thanks to its design—snap it in and go. There’s no rewiring or cutting needed. The fit matches your vehicle’s original parts for a seamless look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdded Features and Benefits\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Dasbecan tail light is built for reliability and performance. Built-in LEDs offer faster response time than traditional bulbs. This improves your signaling, helping prevent accidents. The unit’s tight seal stops water and dust from getting inside, so it stays bright and effective in any climate. Each feature is engineered for everyday drivers who value safety and style.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis assembly only fits vehicles with original factory-installed LED tail lights. It is not for trucks with halogen assemblies. Double-check the product’s connector images before buying. Compare them with your vehicle’s current plug. This ensures a perfect fit and trouble-free installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose Dasbecan LED Tail Lights?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLED tail lights offer several advantages over halogen lights. They turn on instantly, providing better reaction time for other drivers. LEDs are also energy efficient and last longer. You’ll need fewer replacements over your truck’s life. The updated look adds value to your vehicle and can enhance resale appeal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey features of the Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHigh-intensity LED bulbs for maximum brightness and safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSturdy ABS housing with a reinforced polycarbonate lens.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eQuick, tool-free, plug-and-play installation process.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eOEM part numbers: CH2800203, 68093079AB, 68093079AC, CH2800203C.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompatible only with models that have factory-installed LED tail lights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eReady to enhance your drive? Replace that old assembly to enjoy improved visibility and a fresh look. The Dasbecan system helps your truck stand out, whether in traffic or parked. Enhanced brightness reduces rear-end collision risks in dim settings. The durable construction means years of reliable lighting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor vehicle lighting safety details, see \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nhtsa.gov\/equipment\/lighting\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eNHTSA Vehicle Lighting\u003c\/a\u003e. For more options, visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eautomotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this tail light assembly compatible with all RAM 1500 models from 2013 to 2018?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This Dasbecan assembly fits RAM 1500 trucks from 2013 to 2018, but only those that came with LED tail lights from the factory. It will not fit trucks that originally had halogen tail lights. To ensure you order the correct part, check your current tail lights and consult the connector images. If your vehicle has the right plug type and original LEDs, installation will be simple and your new light will work as designed.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the package include installation instructions?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The package does not include step-by-step printed instructions. However, installation is easy due to the design. You just unclip the old assembly, attach the new unit, and secure it in place. Most owners can finish the swap in minutes with basic tools. If you feel uncertain or want to double-check your work, a mechanic can provide quick help.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What should I do if the connector does not match my vehicle's OEM plug?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Always verify the connector before purchase. If the assembly’s plug does not match your existing connector, this product will not work with your RAM. Compare the provided images with your vehicle's plug. If they’re different, you need a tail light assembly built for halogen models or another specialty part. Never force a mismatched connector—it may cause damage or electrical issues.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Why should I choose an LED tail light over a halogen tail light?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e LED tail lights are brighter and respond faster than halogen versions. This can help alert other drivers more quickly. LEDs last much longer, saving you time and money compared to frequent bulb changes. They also use less energy, helping keep your truck’s power system efficient. Their modern look can add value and curb appeal to your RAM truck.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How durable is the Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This tail light is made from high-grade ABS plastic and a tough polycarbonate lens. The housing resists cracks, impacts, scratching, and stays clear after years of sunlight and weather. Its sealed design helps prevent leaks, fogging, or dust buildup, so you get long-lasting performance.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this tail light assembly compatible with all RAM 1500 models from 2013 to 2018?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This Dasbecan assembly fits RAM 1500 trucks from 2013 to 2018, but only those that came with LED tail lights from the factory. It will not fit trucks that originally had halogen tail lights. To ensure you order the correct part, check your current tail lights and consult the connector images. If your vehicle has the right plug type and original LEDs, installation will be simple and your new light will work as designed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the package include installation instructions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The package does not include step-by-step printed instructions. However, installation is easy due to the design. You just unclip the old assembly, attach the new unit, and secure it in place. Most owners can finish the swap in minutes with basic tools. If you feel uncertain or want to double-check your work, a mechanic can provide quick help.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What should I do if the connector does not match my vehicle's OEM plug?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Always verify the connector before purchase. If the assembly’s plug does not match your existing connector, this product will not work with your RAM. Compare the provided images with your vehicle's plug. If they’re different, you need a tail light assembly built for halogen models or another specialty part. Never force a mismatched connector—it may cause damage or electrical issues.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Why should I choose an LED tail light over a halogen tail light?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"LED tail lights are brighter and respond faster than halogen versions. This can help alert other drivers more quickly. LEDs last much longer, saving you time and money compared to frequent bulb changes. They also use less energy, helping keep your truck’s power system efficient. Their modern look can add value and curb appeal to your RAM truck.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How durable is the Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This tail light is made from high-grade ABS plastic and a tough polycarbonate lens. The housing resists cracks, impacts, scratching, and stays clear after years of sunlight and weather. Its sealed design helps prevent leaks, fogging, or dust buildup, so you get long-lasting performance.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTo sum up, the Dasbecan LED Tail Lights Assembly offers easy installation, high-end looks, and long-lasting performance for your RAM truck. Bright, reliable lights keep you safe and stylish. Explore more options in our automotive collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: LED, Tail, Lights, Assembly\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Dasbecan","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47003725267179,"sku":"LPNO393758024","price":53.09,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71OMN25gCmL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761720095"},{"product_id":"trq-wheel-hub-bearing-module-616f","title":"TRQ Rear Wheel Hub Bearing Module LH \u0026 RH 2-Piece Set Nissan Frontier Xterra OPE","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Grade A+ Brand New\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003eOPEN BOX — Grade A+ Brand New. This item was opened but is in brand-new condition, uninstalled and ready to go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eOverview\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGet full rear-axle coverage with the TRQ Wheel Bearing \u0026amp; Hub Assembly 2-Piece Set, designed specifically for the Nissan Frontier and Nissan Xterra. TRQ — Trusted Reliable Quality — engineers these modules to meet or exceed OEM specifications, so you get a direct-fit replacement without modifications or special tooling. Each unit features precision-engineered races, a sealed bearing cartridge that keeps out dirt, water, and road debris, and high-quality materials built to handle everything from daily city commutes to off-road trail use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWorn rear wheel bearings show up as grinding or humming noises that change pitch with vehicle speed, vibration felt through the floor or steering wheel, uneven tire wear, or perceptible wheel wobble. Replacing both rear hubs at the same time restores smooth, quiet rotation, restores proper wheel alignment geometry, and improves braking confidence — all at once. Because both the left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) rear modules are included, you avoid the common mistake of replacing only one side and finding the opposite bearing fails shortly after.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFitment covers Nissan Frontier models from 2005 through 2019 and Nissan Xterra models from 2005 through 2015. Always confirm your vehicle's year, model, and trim before purchasing to ensure compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's Included\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 × TRQ Rear Wheel Hub \u0026amp; Bearing Module — Left (LH \/ Driver Side)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1 × TRQ Rear Wheel Hub \u0026amp; Bearing Module — Right (RH \/ Passenger Side)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSpecs \u0026amp; Fitment\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e TRQ (Trusted Reliable Quality)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePosition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rear — Left \u0026amp; Right (2-Piece Set)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFitment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Nissan Frontier 2005–2019; Nissan Xterra 2005–2015\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDesign:\u003c\/strong\u003e Direct-fit OEM replacement, no modification required\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sealed bearing cartridge with integrated dust\/moisture seals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuantity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 modules per set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUPC:\u003c\/strong\u003e 191213528884\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eASIN:\u003c\/strong\u003e B0784TS1YZ\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"TRQ","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47012443521259,"sku":"LPNO382729500","price":67.66,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71NdnX4FOaL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1761809697"},{"product_id":"4g-lte-android-carplay-screen-7951","title":"RevcarX 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen Car 7\" QLED Touchscreen Wireless CarPla","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: NEW\u003c\/strong\u003e — NEW. Brand New, Never Opened, All Parts Still Sealed\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Brand New, Never Opened, All Parts Still Sealed\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your driving experience with the 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen, a state-of-the-art portable car stereo designed to bring seamless connectivity and entertainment to your vehicle. This 7-inch QLED touchscreen device offers wireless integration with both Apple CarPlay and Android Auto, ensuring that your favorite apps and services are always within reach.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe vibrant 7-inch QLED display boasts a resolution of 1024x600 pixels, delivering crisp and clear visuals for navigation, media playback, and more. The touchscreen is highly responsive, allowing for effortless control and interaction with the system. Whether you're adjusting settings, selecting music, or navigating through maps, the intuitive interface ensures a user-friendly experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEquipped with 4G LTE capabilities, this car stereo allows you to stay connected on the go. By inserting a compatible SIM card, you can access online services, stream music, and receive real-time traffic updates without relying on your smartphone's data connection. This feature is particularly beneficial for those who frequently travel through areas with limited Wi-Fi availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWireless CarPlay and Android Auto integration enable you to connect your smartphone to the car stereo without the hassle of cables. This wireless functionality provides a clutter-free environment and allows for automatic connection upon entering the vehicle. Access your favorite apps, make hands-free calls, send messages, and use voice commands to control various functions, all while keeping your focus on the road.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inclusion of a 1080P backup camera enhances safety by providing a clear view of the area behind your vehicle. This high-definition camera assists with parking and reversing maneuvers, reducing the risk of accidents and ensuring peace of mind. The system also supports HDMI input, allowing you to connect external devices such as gaming consoles or media players for additional entertainment options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith four audio outputs, the car stereo delivers high-quality sound to your vehicle's speaker system. The built-in Digital Signal Processor (DSP) allows for precise equalization, signal delay adjustments, and bass enhancements, enabling you to customize the audio experience to your preferences. Whether you're listening to music, podcasts, or audiobooks, the sound quality is sure to impress.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGPS tracking functionality ensures accurate navigation and location services. The built-in GPS module supports various navigation apps, providing real-time directions and traffic updates. This feature is invaluable for long trips, daily commutes, and exploring new areas, ensuring you reach your destination efficiently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation of the 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen is straightforward, with a design that accommodates various vehicle models. The package includes all necessary mounting hardware and cables, along with a comprehensive user manual to guide you through the setup process. Even those with minimal technical expertise can achieve a professional installation with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to its core features, the car stereo supports a range of multimedia formats, including MP3, WMA, WAV, and FLAC for audio, as well as AVI, MP4, and MKV for video. This versatility ensures compatibility with your existing media library, allowing you to enjoy your favorite content without conversion hassles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who prioritize safety, the system supports steering wheel control functions, enabling you to manage audio playback, answer calls, and navigate menus without taking your hands off the wheel. This integration enhances convenience and minimizes distractions while driving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegular software updates ensure that the car stereo remains compatible with the latest smartphone operating systems and applications. These updates can be easily downloaded and installed via the device's Wi-Fi connection, keeping your system up-to-date with new features and improvements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen compatible with all vehicle models? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen is designed to be compatible with a wide range of vehicle models. Its universal mounting system and adjustable brackets allow for installation in most cars. However, it's recommended to check the dimensions and mounting requirements against your vehicle's dashboard specifications to ensure a proper fit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use my existing smartphone data plan with the 4G LTE feature? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can use your existing smartphone data plan by inserting a compatible SIM card into the device. This allows the car stereo to access 4G LTE networks for online services. Ensure that your data plan supports tethering or hotspot functionality, and verify compatibility with your mobile carrier.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the device support offline navigation? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the device supports offline navigation by allowing you to download maps for use without an internet connection. This is particularly useful in areas with limited or no network coverage. You can download maps from supported navigation apps and store them on the device's internal storage for offline use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I update the software on the car stereo? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Software updates can be performed via the device's Wi-Fi connection. Navigate to the settings menu, select the software update option, and follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest firmware. Regular updates ensure compatibility with new smartphone operating systems and applications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is professional installation required for this device? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e While the device is designed for easy installation with a comprehensive user manual and all necessary mounting hardware included, professional installation is recommended if you're not comfortable with car electronics. Professional installation ensures optimal performance and integration with your vehicle's existing systems.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the 4G LTE Android CarPlay Screen is a comprehensive solution for enhancing your vehicle's infotainment system. Its combination of a high-quality QLED touchscreen, wireless smartphone integration, 4G LTE connectivity, and advanced features like a 1080P backup camera and GPS tracking make it an invaluable addition to any car. Whether you're looking to upgrade your current system or add modern functionality to an older vehicle, this device offers a seamless and enjoyable driving experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information and to explore our full range of products, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\"\u003eExplore our electronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: 4G, LTE, CarPlay, Android\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"RevcarX","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47024287088875,"sku":"LPNO329472169","price":79.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/7195uaih5cL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762148198"},{"product_id":"eccpp-compressor-toyota-sienna-c7bf","title":"ECCPP A\/C Compressor with Clutch for 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna 3.0L - Fast Cooling","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"background:#111;color:#E5CA9F;padding:12px 14px;border-radius:8px;font-family:monospace;font-size:14px;margin:0 0 16px 0\"\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCONDITION: OPEN BOX\u003c\/strong\u003e — OPEN BOX. Brand New, No Sign Of Use\u003c\/div\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Brand New. No signs of use. Fast cooling. Reliable performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ECCPP A\/C Compressor with Clutch is made for 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna 3.0L models. This powerful compressor delivers quick, consistent cooling. It is engineered for efficient climate control, even in the most extreme heat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis automotive compressor uses proven aluminum. It resists corrosion and wear. All components meet strict OEM standards. A precision clutch and a six-groove pulley come pre-installed. The unit arrives pre-filled with the correct PAG 100 oil. Oil top-off is unnecessary, which simplifies the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEngineered for a straightforward fit, this compressor makes repairs fast. No complicated modifications are needed. The kit is compatible with most original Toyota Sienna brackets and hardware for model years 1998 through 2003. Enjoy reliability and peace of mind with every installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExperience strong airflow with the robust 10PA17C compressor design. Compatible with R-134A refrigerant, this part is tailor-made for cooling systems of Toyota Sienna 3.0L vehicles. Each compressor undergoes strict quality checks during production, ensuring long life and safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVehicle Compatibility:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1998-2003 Toyota Sienna CE 3.0L V6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1998-2003 Toyota Sienna LE 3.0L V6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1999, 2001-2003 Toyota Sienna XLE 3.0L V6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2003 Toyota Sienna XLE Limited 3.0L V6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ECCPP A\/C Compressor is a smart investment. It keeps your vehicle cool and your system efficient. Crafted to last, this part offers durable performance through years of driving. Easy setup means less time in the shop and more time on the road.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProper air conditioning means more than comfort. Fog-free windows help you drive safer in tough weather. Choose ECCPP to maximize the convenience and safety of your Sienna. Regular maintenance and high-quality parts protect your vehicle’s value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhy select ECCPP? Their compressor prioritizes reliability. Every component matches precise specifications, helping avoid leaks or failure over time. Investing in a trusted brand offers real peace of mind. Learn more about \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Automobile_air_conditioning\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eautomobile air conditioning\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor all automotive cooling system needs, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003esee our automotive collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Find compressor options for more vehicles and top A\/C parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this compressor compatible with every 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This ECCPP compressor is only made for the 3.0L V6 engine found in most 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna models. Double check your Sienna’s VIN, trim, and engine label before buying. The compressor will not work for Sienna models with different engines or model years outside 1998-2003. Simply match the engine and year for a sure fit. If in doubt, consult your owner’s manual or ask a mechanic to identify your system before ordering the part.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do I need to add extra oil or do anything special for installation?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This ECCPP compressor is shipped pre-filled with enough PAG 100 oil for standard Sienna A\/C systems. No oil top-off is needed for most installations. If your system has leaked or the old compressor failed badly, a mechanic should flush it and check oil level. This prevents contamination and ensures all moving parts get proper lubrication. Always follow installation instructions and use fresh system o-rings. This will make sure you get the best long-term results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can someone with basic skills install this compressor, or is professional help required?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installing an automotive A\/C compressor takes some technical skill. Basic automotive know-how helps, but removing and replacing the part involves handling refrigerant, precise torque specs, and a system vacuum. We strongly suggest using a licensed mechanic for the job. Professional installation reduces the risk of leaks and ensures perfect performance from your cooling system. Skipping professional help could cause issues, like poor cooling, system noise, or long-term damage. It is best to trust experts for the best results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I know when it is time to replace my Sienna A\/C compressor?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Signs your compressor may need replacing include loud noises when running or weak airflow from your vents. Grinding or rattling can mean the clutch or internal parts are worn. If your A\/C blows warm air even after a recharge, the compressor could be failing. Leaks around the compressor are also a strong warning sign. For most issues, having a certified mechanic inspect your A\/C system will help confirm the problem and avoid costly mistakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is this compressor compatible with every 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This ECCPP compressor is only made for the 3.0L V6 engine found in most 1998-2003 Toyota Sienna models. Double check your Sienna’s VIN, trim, and engine label before buying. The compressor will not work for Sienna models with different engines or model years outside 1998-2003. Simply match the engine and year for a sure fit. If in doubt, consult your owner’s manual or ask a mechanic to identify your system before ordering the part.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Do I need to add extra oil or do anything special for installation?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This ECCPP compressor is shipped pre-filled with enough PAG 100 oil for standard Sienna A\/C systems. No oil top-off is needed for most installations. If your system has leaked or the old compressor failed badly, a mechanic should flush it and check oil level. This prevents contamination and ensures all moving parts get proper lubrication. Always follow installation instructions and use fresh system o-rings. This will make sure you get the best long-term results.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can someone with basic skills install this compressor, or is professional help required?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Installing an automotive A\/C compressor takes some technical skill. Basic automotive know-how helps, but removing and replacing the part involves handling refrigerant, precise torque specs, and a system vacuum. We strongly suggest using a licensed mechanic for the job. Professional installation reduces the risk of leaks and ensures perfect performance from your cooling system. Skipping professional help could cause issues, like poor cooling, system noise, or long-term damage. It is best to trust experts for the best results.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I know when it is time to replace my Sienna A\/C compressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Signs your compressor may need replacing include loud noises when running or weak airflow from your vents. Grinding or rattling can mean the clutch or internal parts are worn. If your A\/C blows warm air even after a recharge, the compressor could be failing. Leaks around the compressor are also a strong warning sign. For most issues, having a certified mechanic inspect your A\/C system will help confirm the problem and avoid costly mistakes.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eECCPP. Compressor. Toyota. Sienna.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"ECCPP","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47024314974443,"sku":"LPNO393571248","price":97.11,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/81kPT4bClGL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762148889"},{"product_id":"brother-dr420-drum-unit-561b","title":"Brother Genuine DR420 Drum Unit – Seamless Integration, 12,000 Page Yield, Black","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eGrade A, Does not appear to be used\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Brother Genuine DR420 Drum Unit ensures seamless, high-quality printing with up to 12,000 crisp black pages. It offers reliable performance and easy integration for office or home use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis drum unit is essential for any printer in need of consistent, clear results. The Brother DR420 Drum Unit ensures vibrant text and images with every print. It supports long printing sessions, reducing the need for constant replacements. Designed by Brother, this drum unit is made for longevity and durability. Users can trust each print job will meet professional standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEasy Installation and Reliability\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe DR420 Drum Unit features a user-friendly design. Installation is simple, so you can replace it in just a few steps. No special tools are required. Its secure fit guards your printer against jams or misfeeds, helping your business stay productive. It prevents unnecessary printer wear and tear, supporting regular use for months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrinter Compatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe DR420 Drum Unit works with many Brother devices. It supports popular printers like the DCP-7060D and HL-2240, and also fits models such as MFC-7240 or IntelliFax-2840. If you are unsure about compatibility, check the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/www.brother-usa.com\/products\/dr420\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eofficial Brother website\u003c\/a\u003e for a full list. This cross-compatibility ensures flexibility for different workspaces and devices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCost-Effective Performance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFrequent replacements cost time and money. The Brother DR420 Drum Unit stands out for its high page yield and consistent print quality. It minimizes downtime, so you get more work done. Investing in a genuine Brother drum unit means fewer errors and maintenance calls. It helps extend the life of your original Brother printer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnvironmental Responsibility\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBrother is committed to helping the environment. Once the drum unit reaches the end of its life, take advantage of Brother’s recycling program. The program keeps drum units out of landfills. Follow simple steps on Brother’s site to return used items responsibly. This approach supports eco-friendly offices and encourages smart recycling for all users.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose Brother Genuine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eGenuine Brother products are designed to work perfectly with Brother printers. The DR420 Drum Unit keeps print jobs reliable and sharp. It reduces the chances of printer errors and guarantees professional results, page after page. Choosing genuine supplies means your printer receives the right care and delivers the print quality you expect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the actual page yield of the Brother Genuine DR420 Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Brother DR420 Drum Unit can produce up to 12,000 printed pages, based on 5% coverage per page as measured by Brother. This high yield makes it a great option for offices and small businesses that require consistent and frequent print jobs. If you often print many pages, you can trust this drum unit to maintain quality until it needs replacement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Which Brother printers can use the DR420 Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The DR420 is made to fit several popular Brother printer models. Examples include the DCP-7060D, HL-2240, and MFC-7240. It also works with HL-2270DW and IntelliFax-2840. Always confirm by checking your printer’s model number. Visit Brother’s official site for a complete updated list and more information on compatibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I correctly install the Brother DR420 Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Begin by turning off your Brother printer and opening the front cover. Remove the old drum and toner assembly from the device. Detach the toner cartridge by pressing the colored lock lever and gently pulling it free. Insert the toner into your new DR420 drum until it clicks securely. Slide the full assembly back in and close the printer’s cover. Turn on your machine and print a test page to confirm installation is correct.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the main difference between a drum unit and toner cartridge?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The toner cartridge holds powdered toner. This powder forms the text and images on your prints. The drum unit, like the DR420, transfers toner from the cartridge onto your paper. Both are essential, but they serve different functions. Over time, you will need to replace each component to maintain strong print results. Neglecting to do so may result in faded or streaky pages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What steps do I take to recycle my used Brother DR420 Drum Unit?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To recycle, visit Brother’s official recycling portal. There you can request a prepaid shipping label for your used drum. Package the drum properly and ship it back to Brother, at no extra cost. By using this service, you help reduce waste and support the environment, while sticking to responsible disposal practices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the Brother Genuine DR420 Drum Unit to ensure your printer always delivers sharp, bold results. Leave behind troubles with faded prints or error messages by relying on a trusted component. Maximize your printer’s lifespan and value with Brother’s proven technology. For a seamless shopping experience, explore more top-rated \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/general-merchandise\"\u003eGeneral Merchandise Collection\u003c\/a\u003e products suited for busy homes and fast-paced offices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor additional details, full compatibility lists, and warranty terms, refer to the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/www.brother-usa.com\/products\/dr420\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eofficial Brother DR420 page\u003c\/a\u003e. Investing in genuine Brother accessories ensures device integrity and reduces maintenance issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Brother, DR420, Drum, Printer\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Brother","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47024497557739,"sku":"LPNO343051194","price":56.04,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61VMGxU7QiL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762160635"},{"product_id":"maiwo-usb-hard-drive-enclosure-d942","title":"MAIWO USB C Hard Drive Enclosure for 2.5\"\/3.5\" SATA SSD\/HDD with Laptop Docking Station and USB Hubs","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eGrade A, Powers on\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MAIWO USB C Hard Drive Enclosure offers fast, reliable storage and flexible connectivity. It supports both 2.5\\\" and 3.5\\\" SATA SSDs and HDDs, making it ideal for those who want to expand or back up their data quickly and efficiently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis hard drive enclosure features a strong aluminum alloy case. This material helps protect your drives and efficiently dissipates heat, keeping your storage safe even during long sessions. It also gives the enclosure a professional, premium look that fits into any setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MAIWO enclosure goes beyond simple storage. It acts as a feature-rich laptop docking station too. Access high-speed ports, including USB-A 3.0 and USB-C 3.1. Use the SD and TF card slots for media files without fuss. The HDMI port allows you to plug into external monitors, making it great for dual display work or presentations. Enjoy fast, stable internet with the Gigabit Ethernet port.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstallation is easy and tool-free. Slide in your drive, close the lid, and connect to your computer. No screws or special gear are required. Plug-and-play support means you can use it right away on Windows, macOS, Linux, or Android. No extra drivers needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePerformance stands out here. Thanks to SATA III and UASP protocol support, you get speedy transfers up to 6Gbps. USB 3.1 Gen 2 technology boosts speeds even more. This is perfect for large data transfers, regular backups, video editing, or moving big media libraries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe design is compact and modern. It fits easily on your desk and doesn’t take up much space. The aluminum finish looks attractive and adds to the structure's durability. Built-in heat dissipation helps your drives stay cool and last longer. This makes it a good fit for home offices or busy workplaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis MAIWO enclosure also adds convenience by centralizing your devices and accessories. No more reaching around for multiple dongles or adapters. You can connect keyboards, mice, USB drives, and external screens in one place. This makes multitasking and productivity simpler every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecurity and protection are important. The solid build ensures your hardware is safe from bumps or falls. Aluminum protects against overheating and helps your drives work reliably. The enclosure shields your data with stable, constant power for both SSD and HDD models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the MAIWO USB C Hard Drive Enclosure compatible with both SSDs and HDDs?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The MAIWO enclosure works with both 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch SATA SSDs and HDDs. You can use a small 2.5-inch SSD for speed or a larger 3.5-inch HDD for more space. This means you have plenty of choices to upgrade, back up, or transfer your data using whatever spare drive you already have, or a new one you pick.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the enclosure require external power for operation?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e For 3.5-inch hard drives, MAIWO includes an external power adapter to supply enough power. This keeps large drives running smoothly and prevents data loss. For 2.5-inch drives, the USB connection is usually enough. It’s easy and convenient for smaller SSDs and laptop drives, so that you can use it anywhere.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What operating systems are compatible with this enclosure?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This device works with Windows, macOS, Linux, and Android systems. You can plug it into most laptops, desktops, and even some tablets or Android phones with OTG support. With its wide compatibility, you don’t need to worry about driver downloads. Just connect and use it right away on your preferred device.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What transfer speeds can be expected with this enclosure?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Speeds reach up to 6Gbps with SATA III drives, especially with UASP support enabled. This means you can transfer gigabytes of files within seconds. USB 3.1 Gen 2 offers fast performance for large backups, film libraries, or editing directly from your drive. Actual speeds can vary depending on your hardware and cable choices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What types of peripherals can be connected through the docking station?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The docking station supports multiple devices at once. Plug in USB flash drives, keyboards, mice, or even printers. Use the HDMI to connect your laptop to bigger displays or TV screens. It handles SD and microSD cards easily for cameras or phones. Everything centralizes through one slim, efficient enclosure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo sum up, the MAIWO USB C Hard Drive Enclosure stands out for its speed, portability, and strong build. You get multi-drive support, tool-free setup, and high-speed connections in a single device. It is designed for anyone who values reliable expansion, backup, and connectivity in compact form. See our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\"\u003eElectronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more innovative storage options to fit your needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more technical information about SATA and its background, visit \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Serial_ATA\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: MAIWO, USB C, SATA, Enclosure\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"MAIWO","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47024509321451,"sku":"LPNO348813760","price":71.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/51kch_r1pIL._AC_SL1200.jpg?v=1762160826"},{"product_id":"wireless-carplay-adapter-2025-6f03","title":"5-in-1 Wireless CarPlay Adapter with Netflix \u0026 YouTube - 2025 Model","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eLike New, No Sign Of Damage, Factory Protective Plastic On Screen\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your drive with the 5-in-1 Wireless CarPlay Adapter. This 2025 model quickly transforms factory-wired CarPlay into a smooth wireless experience. Enjoy Apple CarPlay and Android Auto connections with the flexibility of wireless streaming, all in one compact adapter. Stream your favorite shows from Netflix or YouTube right on your car's touchscreen for non-stop entertainment on every ride.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis adapter is built for reliability. Cars with factory-wired CarPlay from 2015 onward are supported. Plug it directly into your USB-A or USB-C port with no tools or apps required. Installation takes seconds. Connect to either Apple or Android phones and switch between them at any time, making it perfect for multi-driver families.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStay connected with advanced technology. The adapter uses 5.8GHz WiFi and Bluetooth 5.3, which gives you a steady, lag-free signal. No more interruptions when streaming video or audio. With 32GB of built-in storage, you can also download shows or apps before trips. Watch content offline even if you lose cell service, which is ideal for long drives and remote areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal car controls remain fully functional. You keep voice assistants like Siri or Google, use steering wheel buttons, and navigate using touchscreen or knobs. The adapter works in the background, so making calls, sending texts, or switching music stays effortless. No learning curve is required—your vehicle feels the same, but with more streaming and connectivity features added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSafety and convenience come standard. The wireless CarPlay function means no more fumbling with cords. Simply enter your car, and the adapter auto-connects your device. Parents can entertain kids with YouTube while maintaining their focus on the road. Drivers can access maps, calls, or messages hands-free, boosting safety and comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompatibility covers nearly every car. Any wired CarPlay model from 2015 or later is supported. Most major brands, such as Ford, Toyota, Honda, and Audi are included. The adapter works with iPhones running iOS 10 and later, and Android devices running Android 11 up. This broad support reduces buyer uncertainty and makes it a dependable gift option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Makes This Wireless Adapter Different?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStream Netflix and YouTube. Watch content directly, no mirroring required. Download shows with 32GB storage for offline viewing on long trips.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUniversal car support for 2015 and newer wired CarPlay. Works with most brands and models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFast, smooth wireless. Uses advanced WiFi and Bluetooth for stability and quick pairing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlug-and-play design. No complex setup. Works with USB-A or USB-C. Installs in seconds and auto-pairs your device each time you enter the car.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaintains all original controls. Use voice, navigation, and steering buttons as usual.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this adapter compatible with my car model?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The adapter supports most vehicles with factory-wired CarPlay from 2015 onward. Nearly all major brands are compatible, including Ford, Honda, and Volkswagen. To be certain, check your car for a USB-A or USB-C port with wired CarPlay. It’s best to confirm your vehicle’s year and system specs for reassurance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use both iPhone and Android phones with the adapter?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The adapter allows you to use both Apple CarPlay and Android Auto wirelessly. iPhones with iOS 10 or later, and Android devices with Android 11 or above are supported. You can switch between brands by simply pairing a new device, which is helpful if your household uses both platforms.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I install and connect the adapter in my car?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Plug the adapter into your car’s USB-A or USB-C port. On your phone, enable Bluetooth and WiFi, then follow the on-screen instructions to pair once. The adapter will remember your device after the first setup. No need for extra apps, tools, or technical knowledge. Installation takes less than two minutes, so you’re quickly ready to go.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the adapter change how my car’s controls work?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e No, it preserves full access to all original controls. Keep using voice assistants, steering controls, screen touch, and media knobs as before. You won’t lose any features or functions after installing the wireless adapter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I watch Netflix and YouTube on long trips or with poor signal?\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, just download your favorite shows to the built-in 32GB storage before you travel. Play them back offline, even where there’s no internet. You can watch full-length movies or music videos without using your phone’s data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-in-1 Wireless CarPlay Adapter is a smart upgrade for any tech-loving driver. It boosts entertainment options, keeps controls easy, and lets you stream or download favorite content. Install it in minutes and forget about cords. Enjoy the freedom of wireless connectivity for all your devices. Want to know more details on how CarPlay adapters work? Read the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Apple_CarPlay\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eofficial CarPlay overview\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\"\u003eExplore our electronics collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Wireless, CarPlay, Adapter, Streaming\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"MTAKYA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47028973928683,"sku":"LPNO348822727","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71Lq52l5-8L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762236298"},{"product_id":"komzer-unloader-brace-9889","title":"Komzer OA Unloader Knee Brace – Effective Support for Osteoarthritis Relief","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eAll pieces included, like new\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Komzer OA Unloader Knee Brace gives focused osteoarthritis relief. It reduces stress on your knee and boosts your daily comfort. This knee brace is perfect for daily use and helps promote better movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGet support where it’s needed most. This Komzer knee brace supports weak or injured knees. It helps lower pain and pressure caused by joint problems. You will feel more stable wearing this brace, thanks to its three-point leverage design and reliable construction. Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.arthritis.org\/health-wellness\/treatment\/alternative-therapies\/assistive-devices\/knee-braces\"\u003eArthritis Foundation guide\u003c\/a\u003e for more details on knee braces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lightweight Komzer OA Unloader Knee Brace has a slim frame. It sits quietly under pants. The brace works best for people with unicompartmental osteoarthritis. This is when arthritis is found mainly on the inside or outside of your knee. The design may cut down on the need for surgery or stronger medicines. Use it as a daily tool for pain management. It helps preserve your joint health and lets you move with more ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery part is made for convenience. Adjustable straps secure your knee for a perfect fit. Universal sizing gives flexibility and saves money. Quick-release buckles let you put it on or off fast—no special skills needed. Soft condyle pads cushion and steady your knee during walking or standing. Many users praise its comfort for long hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features include:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThree-point leverage reduces joint pressure for fast pain relief.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight and low-profile, fits under clothes for discreet wear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne size for most people, thanks to fully adjustable straps.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuick-release buckles save time when taking the brace on or off.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft condyle pads add stability and cut down on rubbing or soreness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis knee brace helps if you have osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, or other knee joint issues. Wear it for daily tasks, walking, or light exercise. Many people find it helps them stand longer and feel more secure. Its thoughtful features make it handy for everyday pain control. Durable materials give you support for the long term. Compact enough for travel, you can take it anywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you are active or just need support at work, this brace fits in with any lifestyle. It’s easy to clean and reuse. No complicated parts mean you can use it right out of the box. If you or someone you know has a knee condition, this brace can help manage pain. It also improves confidence during movement. It’s often chosen by individuals who want a non-surgical way to protect their knees.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the Komzer OA Unloader Knee Brace relieve pain and help knee health? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Komzer brace uses three strong connection points to guide weight away from your sore area. By shifting force, it quickly takes pressure off the sore spot. This helps reduce pain during activities like standing or walking. The support provided may help slow down joint wear and protect your knee from further damage. Regular use can improve day-to-day comfort and increase your activity level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can this brace fit most people, and how do adjustments work? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The brace features universal sizing. It adjusts using sturdy straps so it fits a wide range of adults, from slender to larger legs. You adjust the straps until you feel firm but gentle support. You won’t need to buy a second size or visit a specialist for fitting. The brace stays in place even with movement. Proper adjustment helps avoid slipping or discomfort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the Komzer OA Brace comfortable during workouts or active tasks, and what are some benefits? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this brace is designed for comfort and freedom of movement. The slim, lightweight build means you can wear it while walking, working, or doing light sports. It will not limit bending, stretching, or moderate climbing. Breathable materials keep your leg cool. The comfort pads stop irritation during long wear. This makes it ideal for all-day use at home or outdoors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want to learn more about other personal care and knee support options, \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\"\u003esee our full collection here\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: knee, brace, osteoarthritis, support\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Komzer","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47034673299691,"sku":"LPNO325597240","price":59.61,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61fMRAGEh1L._SL1500.jpg?v=1762316361"},{"product_id":"blonde-unicorn-ash-brown-bob-wig-03ac","title":"BLONDE UNICORN Ash Brown 12 Inch Bob Wig with Bangs - 100% Human Hair, 180% Density","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eA+ condition. Item appears to be unused and in perfect shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy effortless \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e style with the BLONDE UNICORN Ash Brown 12 Inch Bob Wig with Bangs. Made from 100% human hair, it offers natural color and movement. The 180% density gives you thick volume, and the ash brown shade flatters many skin tones. This wig is perfect for daily wear, providing a soft comfortable fit even during long days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e wig sits just above the shoulders, making it suitable for work, casual outings, or formal events. The ash brown color strikes a great balance. It is neither too light nor too dark, so it works well for most users. The bangs are trimmed to gently frame your face, softening your features and giving you a classic, polished appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh density means this wig looks naturally full. It doesn't appear thin like some machine-made styles. You’ll love running your hands through it. With 180% density, enjoy the freedom to change your part, try a light curl, or keep it sleek and chic. The hair is 100% unprocessed and can handle heat tools, dyeing, or other gentle restyling methods. Always test a small strand if you plan to change the shade or texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cap design sets this \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e apart. Many wigs cause heat buildup and discomfort, especially after hours of use. This unit comes with a breathable mesh cap. It lets your scalp breathe, preventing sweat and irritation. If you have allergies or a sensitive scalp, this feature is a big advantage. You can wear the wig for parties, meetings, or daily chores in comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability is another key strength. A properly cared-for BLONDE UNICORN wig can last over two years. The human hair construction is more resilient to tangles and breakage than synthetic options. Minimal shedding means less clean-up and more time looking your best. This wig takes color well if you want to experiment. For best results, bring it to a pro stylist so you don’t risk damaging the strands. Follow the instructions carefully for washing and conditioning, using only products designed for real human hair. Always store your \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e wig on a head form or in a protective bag to keep it in top shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStyle flexibility is a major plus. The wig arrives ready for wear but can handle adjustments. Trim the bangs shorter, create soft waves, or try different accessories. The ash brown tone is fashionable and easy to blend with other colors if you enjoy highlights or lowlights. This is a great choice for beginners because it’s easy to maintain, but it’s high-quality enough for experienced wig lovers too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBLONDE UNICORN has earned the trust of over a million users worldwide. They focus on quality, safety, and style, always listening to feedback. Their high standards mean you’re getting a product that not only looks good but lasts. Continuous upgrades help their wigs remain comfortable and realistic. For more advice on selecting your perfect style, or to look at other options, \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\"\u003eexplore our personal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVisit \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Wig\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e to learn more about wigs and how human hair products compare to synthetic options. It’s a great starting place for understanding care techniques and the history of wigs in fashion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should I care for my BLONDE UNICORN Ash Brown 12 Inch Bob Wig?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To keep your \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e wig looking its best, gently wash it with shampoo made for human hair. Rinse with cool water and use a lightweight conditioner for moisture. Avoid pulling or twisting the strands. Pat it dry with a towel and let it air dry naturally. If you need to style it, use heat tools on a low setting. When not wearing it, store your wig on a stand to help it keep its shape. Always brush it out before washing and after each use to prevent tangling. If you style or color the wig, always use gentle, professional products.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I dye or restyle this wig?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The BLONDE UNICORN bob wig is made from 100% unprocessed human hair. This means you can dye, perm, or heat-style the wig. For best results, test a small patch before applying dye all over. If you are unsure or want a drastic change, take it to a professional. This helps keep the wig healthy and looking great. Remember, frequent chemical treatments can reduce lifespan, so treat the wig gently and only color when needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this wig suitable for sensitive scalps or medical hair loss?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, this wig features a soft, breathable inner cap that reduces irritation and keeps your scalp cool. It is designed with comfort in mind, which makes it ideal for those experiencing medical hair loss, scalp sensitivity, or allergies related to synthetic wigs. If you have specific concerns, speak to a dermatologist or hair loss counselor to ensure this type of cap is safe and comfortable for your condition. The natural human hair fibers can also reduce itching compared to plastic-based wigs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are some tips for making the wig look more natural?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use a wide-toothed comb to style your bob wig and avoid tangles. Apply a small amount of hair oil for added shine, but avoid the roots to prevent greasiness. Trim the bangs or layers to fit your face if you desire. Use powder or foundation along the hairline to blend the wig cap with your skin. Wearing a wig cap underneath can hide your natural hair and hold the wig in place. Adjust the fit with included straps for security and to stop slipping.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you invest in the BLONDE UNICORN Ash Brown 12 Inch Bob Wig with Bangs, you're choosing quality, comfort, \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e style, and dependability. This human hair \u003cstrong\u003ebob\u003c\/strong\u003e is versatile, classic, and easy to manage. Wear it every day, or switch up your look for special moments. The design suits most face shapes, and the soft, natural feel boosts confidence. Try the BLONDE UNICORN difference and enjoy a new level of wig comfort and style.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeywords:\u003c\/strong\u003e bob, human, ash, density\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"BLONDE UNICORN","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47038892769515,"sku":"LPNO390691639","price":98.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71SW_nX2UKL._SL1500.jpg?v=1762495605"},{"product_id":"royal-shade-12x20-waterproof-canopy-0808","title":"Royal Shade 12' x 20' Waterproof Grey Pergola Sun Shade Canopy Replacement Cover - UPF50, 260 GSM Cloth","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eA+ condition, Item appears to be new.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your outdoor area with the Royal Shade 12' x 20' Waterproof Grey Pergola Sun Shade Canopy. This replacement canopy is built for comfort, durability, and style. Get instant shelter and outstanding UV protection with its commercial-strength 260 GSM HDPE fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis canopy is fully waterproof. Rainwater will not seep through, so your patio stays dry and usable. The UPF50 rating means the fabric blocks 95% of UV rays. Your family and furniture stay safe from sun damage. The canopy can keep the area underneath up to 30% cooler, so you enjoy more time outdoors, even in summer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Royal Shade pergola canopy sets a new standard for outdoor \u003cstrong\u003ecanopy\u003c\/strong\u003e covers. The neutral grey looks great in any décor. Use it on most metal or wooden pergolas for a fresh and modern look. If you need a different size, Royal Shade offers custom options to fit unique structures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eStrong stainless steel weighted rods keep the canopy in place. Grommets every 2 feet help anchor the cover securely. The installation process is simple and quick, taking little time with basic tools. The included guide walks you through every step. Set up does not require special skills or experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe fabric is tough but also breathable. Air moves through to prevent heat buildup, reducing that boxed-in feeling. HDPE cloth resists tears and fraying, so it holds up against wind, sun, and rain for years. Its structure does not sag easily, maintaining an attractive look all season.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003epergola\u003c\/strong\u003e canopy is a smart investment for anyone who loves being outside. It gives shade, blocks rain, and can extend the use of your patio or garden for parties, dining, or simply relaxing. The Royal Shade cover makes your outdoor living space much more versatile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-quality stitching and rugged material make it a reliable choice. Its UV protection also means outdoor cushions and tables last longer. The neutral grey fits well with many color schemes. If you want a durable upgrade, this solution is ideal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cover also comes with a 30-day return policy. Plus, you get a 3-year limited warranty for confidence in your purchase. Royal Shade customer service helps with questions about custom sizing or installation problems. Choose a high-quality \u003cstrong\u003eoutdoor\u003c\/strong\u003e cover for peace of mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How difficult is it to install the Royal Shade Pergola Cover?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installing the canopy is straightforward for most homeowners. The cover has grommets spaced every 2 feet, making it easy to secure to different pergola frames. The included stainless steel weighted rods add tension and help the cover stay in position during wind. You only need basic hand tools to set it up, and the step-by-step instructions make the process simple. If you get stuck, Royal Shade support is available by email.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the canopy provide full protection from heavy rains?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The canopy fabric is made from dense polyester with a PU waterproof layer, designed to stop rainwater from passing through. To avoid puddles on the surface, install the canopy with a slight slope so water drains off easily. This lets you keep using your patio, even during a downpour. The waterproof design also helps shield outdoor furniture and creates a dry area for entertaining.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What if my pergola has unique dimensions? Can the cover be customized?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, Royal Shade offers custom size options for this cover. You just provide your specific pergola measurements when ordering. The company will cut and finish a \u003cstrong\u003ecanopy\u003c\/strong\u003e cover made to fit. This ensures a tight, custom-looking installation for structures that do not match standard sizes. Custom orders often ship quickly and come with the full warranty.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is maintenance required to keep the cover in top shape?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Minimal care is needed for the Royal Shade cover. Spray the fabric with water to remove dust. Mild soap can be used for deeper cleaning, but do not machine wash. Avoid sharp tools or harsh chemicals near the fabric to keep it from tearing. Store the canopy indoors during winter months or when not in use for extended periods. Proper maintenance extends the life of your \u003cstrong\u003ewaterproof\u003c\/strong\u003e canopy.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How difficult is it to install the Royal Shade Pergola Cover?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Installing the canopy is straightforward for most homeowners. The cover has grommets spaced every 2 feet, making it easy to secure to different pergola frames. The included stainless steel weighted rods add tension and help the cover stay in position during wind. You only need basic hand tools to set it up, and the step-by-step instructions make the process simple. If you get stuck, Royal Shade support is available by email.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the canopy provide full protection from heavy rains?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The canopy fabric is made from dense polyester with a PU waterproof layer, designed to stop rainwater from passing through. To avoid puddles on the surface, install the canopy with a slight slope so water drains off easily. This lets you keep using your patio, even during a downpour. The waterproof design also helps shield outdoor furniture and creates a dry area for entertaining.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What if my pergola has unique dimensions? Can the cover be customized?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, Royal Shade offers custom size options for this cover. You just provide your specific pergola measurements when ordering. The company will cut and finish a canopy cover made to fit. This ensures a tight, custom-looking installation for structures that do not match standard sizes. Custom orders often ship quickly and come with the full warranty.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is maintenance required to keep the cover in top shape?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Minimal care is needed for the Royal Shade cover. Spray the fabric with water to remove dust. Mild soap can be used for deeper cleaning, but do not machine wash. Avoid sharp tools or harsh chemicals near the fabric to keep it from tearing. Store the canopy indoors during winter months or when not in use for extended periods. Proper maintenance extends the life of your waterproof canopy.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis durable Royal Shade pergola canopy gives reliable coverage and adds flair to any deck or garden. It outperforms ordinary covers in both waterproofing and longevity. Enjoy outdoor spaces day after day—rain or shine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about fabrics like HDPE at the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/High-density_polyethylene\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia page for HDPE\u003c\/a\u003e. For similar stylish solutions, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eexplore our Home Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: pergola, canopy, waterproof, outdoor\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Royal Shade","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47038933991659,"sku":"LPNO387058365","price":98.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/91Zqr2MQurL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762495853"},{"product_id":"goldenwarm-gold-door-handles-pack-da44","title":"goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior - 4 Pack","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Used - Good. These gold door handles come in B condition, with minor signs of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your home's look with the goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior 4 Pack. These privacy brushed \u003cstrong\u003ebrass\u003c\/strong\u003e levers offer security for bedrooms and bathrooms. Their brushed gold finish provides a sleek, elegant appeal while also resisting fingerprints. Perfect for home improvement projects where you want style and functionality in one package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCrafted from strong zinc alloy, these handles offer reliability. The gold brushed finish protects against scratches and adds a premium feel. Reversible levers fit both right-handed and left-handed doors. This makes installation flexible across different rooms. The ergonomic design ensures every grip feels comfortable yet secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe goldenwarm set stands out for its ease of installation. You just need a Philips or flat-head screwdriver. No drilling or special tools required. The handles use your door's existing holes, reducing effort and mess. Adjustable latches support both 2 3\/8\" and 2 3\/4\" backsets, working with 1 3\/8\"-1 3\/4\" thick doors. This broad compatibility makes them suitable for nearly every standard interior door, whether it's for a modern home or a classic renovation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe privacy function matters most in bedrooms and bathrooms. The integrated push-button lock offers easy security from inside the room. Haven't installed privacy handles before? Don't worry. Each pack comes with clear instructions. An emergency release slot allows for quick access from the outside if needed, which is ideal for family homes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese door handles not only perform but also look impressive. The beautiful gold finish matches many popular fixtures, from drawer pulls to light switches. Whether in matte black, bronze, or another brushed metal, gold accents create a luxury touch. The color coordinates well with many design palettes, from Scandinavian to transitional styles. If you're updating several rooms, order more packs for a cohesive look throughout the home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurability ensures you won't need frequent replacements. Zinc alloy resists rust and wear, while the smooth lever action stays consistent over time. These handles are a quality choice for those who want upgrades that last through daily use. They're also easy to clean—just wipe with a damp cloth to remove smudges or debris.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy choosing goldenwarm, you trust a brand known for reliable hardware. They offer door levers, cabinet pulls, and more. For further reading on handle design and engineering, you may find this Wikipedia article on \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" rel=\"noopener\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Door_handle\" target=\"_blank\"\u003edoor handles\u003c\/a\u003e helpful.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse all our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\"\u003ehome collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more matching hardware and inspiration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I install these handles on both right-handed and left-handed doors? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These goldenwarm gold door handles are made for maximum flexibility. Each handle uses a reversible lever design. This means you can fit them on both right-handed and left-handed doors. Whether you're remodeling or starting new construction, there's no need to buy separate models. No complicated steps—just install as usual. The mechanism remains smooth and secure on either side of the door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these handles easy to set up, and what tools will I need? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installation is straightforward, even for first-timers. You just need a screwdriver and about 10 minutes per handle. The hardware can be attached using the standard holes already in most doors. No extra parts are needed. Every pack includes step-by-step instructions. If you get stuck, support is available online. This set is perfect for quick home improvement upgrades or larger installations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e I want extra security—are these suitable for exterior doors? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This set is designed for indoor use, with a focus on privacy and visual appeal. They are ideal for bedrooms, bathrooms, and closets. For outside doors, such as your front or back entry, choose hardware made specifically for exterior use. Exterior options have additional weatherproofing and stronger locking features to ensure maximum security. Visit the manufacturer or look for outdoor-rated hardware for those needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the gold finish stay bright over time, and how should I clean them? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The high-quality brushed gold finish is engineered to last. The surface resists tarnishing and fingerprints. To keep them bright, clean gently with a soft, damp cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners. This preserves their sheen and prevents scratches. For busy homes or high-traffic areas, this touch of care maintains their appearance for years.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who value reliable and stylish \u003cstrong\u003ehandles\u003c\/strong\u003e, this goldenwarm Gold Door Handles Interior 4 Pack blends security and design. Perfect for modern and classic homes alike. They come from a trusted name in \u003cstrong\u003edoor\u003c\/strong\u003e hardware. For more options, check out our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/home\"\u003ehome collection\u003c\/a\u003e today.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHandles, brass, gold, door\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"goldenwarm","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47039195381995,"sku":"LPNO397978216","price":71.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61u9l4zyejL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762504177"},{"product_id":"kiwi-master-side-mirrors-2579","title":"KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors for 2020-2025 RZR Pro XP, Pro S, Pro R, Turbo R\/4 Accessories Adjustable Folding Rear View Mirror 2883762, Pair","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003ePristine condition. Item is new and unused.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nUpgrade your Polaris RZR with KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors. These side mirrors fit 2020-2025 Polaris RZR Pro XP, Pro S, Pro R, and Turbo R models. They provide clear rear visibility for safer off-road riding. These mirrors are easy to install and deliver reliable performance.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nDesigned for rugged use, the KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors are made of strong cast aluminum. The matte black finish looks sleek and matches factory trims. Each side mirror adjusts easily for your preferred angle. This ensures you have the perfect rear view every time. The breakaway design lets the mirrors fold inward, protecting them from impacts on narrow trails.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nThese mirrors use shatterproof tempered glass for added safety. They give a wide-angle view, reducing blind spots so you can see more of what’s behind you. The direct-mount hardware fits the RZR’s factory roll cage. All parts are included in the box, making installation quick and simple. Once installed, the mirrors stay firmly in place, even during rough rides.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe folding feature is useful when storing or transporting your vehicle. Simply fold the mirrors inward to avoid accidental damage. When you’re ready to ride, fold them back out for a full field of vision. The adjustable head allows both drivers and passengers to customize the view. These mirrors also work well with popular upgrades like windshields or hard doors.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nKIWI MASTER built these mirrors for durability in tough environments. They resist vibration from rough trails and withstand mud, water, and dust. The aluminum housing resists rust and corrosion. You can count on years of dependable use in all weather conditions.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nThese side mirrors are styled to complement your RZR’s appearance. The matte black trim blends with factory and aftermarket accessories. Whether you ride the Pro XP, Pro S, or Turbo R models, these mirrors improve the look and function of your vehicle. The simple design ensures the mirrors are compatible with Polaris OEM part number 2883762.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nAdding these side mirrors upgrades both safety and value. On group rides, you can keep an eye on riders behind you. When reversing or navigating obstacles, the wide reflection helps you avoid hazards. This is especially helpful on tricky terrain or crowded trails. The mirrors also fold in tightly, protecting them when parked or in storage.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nKey features include:\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eOEM fit for 2020-2025 Polaris RZR Pro XP, Pro S, Pro R, Turbo R, and Turbo R 4.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAdjustable, fold-in design to increase durability and safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBreakaway hinge to protect mirrors from impact.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eDurable, corrosion-resistant aluminum construction with matte black finish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eClear, shatterproof tempered glass for a wide rear view.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSimple installation with all required hardware included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nEnhance your RZR with a trusted accessory designed by off-road experts. KIWI MASTER side mirrors boost visibility, increase safety, and look great. Durable materials make them ready for any adventure. If you want more installation details or official Polaris guides, visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polaris.com\/en-us\/off-road\/owner-resources\/help-center\/article\/KA-05512\/\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ePolaris Owner Resources\u003c\/a\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will these side mirrors fit all RZR models?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors are custom-fit for 2020-2025 Polaris RZR Pro XP, Pro S, Pro R, Turbo R, and Turbo R 4-seater models. They may not properly fit older models like the RZR 800 or RZR 900, or other Polaris lines not listed. Always check the year and model of your RZR before purchasing. Each product is engineered for specific mounts used on newer Polaris roll cages. This ensures a snug, vibration-free fit and maximum safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will these mirrors interfere with windshields or hard doors?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e These mirrors mount directly to the factory roll cage using provided brackets and hardware. The design does not interfere with most windshields or hard doors from Polaris or major aftermarket brands. The mounting position is carefully selected to allow for proper installation even after major upgrades. If you have a custom or extra-large windshield, check your RZR’s hardware clearance before final installation. Most riders report seamless integration with factory cab and weatherproof doors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the breakaway hinge feature work for off-road use?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The breakaway hinge system adds extra protection during narrow trail riding or rough terrain. If your mirror hits a tree branch or post, it will fold inward to reduce damage and prevent breakage. After folding, the mirror can be returned to its original position with light pressure. This design makes it safer for off-road use and helps extend the life of the mirror in challenging conditions. The system is especially helpful for riders who navigate wooded trails or tight spaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the benefits of the shatterproof glass used in these mirrors?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The shatterproof tempered glass is designed to resist cracking and breaking on impact. It increases user safety and makes cleaning simple, even in tough, muddy conditions. The wide, clear reflection lets you see more behind your RZR, helping you spot obstacles or riders. This improves both your safety and the safety of others when riding off road. Tempered glass is more durable than standard glass and is less likely to splinter if struck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will these side mirrors fit all RZR models?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors are custom-fit for 2020-2025 Polaris RZR Pro XP, Pro S, Pro R, Turbo R, and Turbo R 4-seater models. They may not properly fit older models like the RZR 800 or RZR 900, or other Polaris lines not listed. Always check the year and model of your RZR before purchasing. Each product is engineered for specific mounts used on newer Polaris roll cages. This ensures a snug, vibration-free fit and maximum safety.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Will these mirrors interfere with windshields or hard doors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"These mirrors mount directly to the factory roll cage using provided brackets and hardware. The design does not interfere with most windshields or hard doors from Polaris or major aftermarket brands. The mounting position is carefully selected to allow for proper installation even after major upgrades. If you have a custom or extra-large windshield, check your RZR’s hardware clearance before final installation. Most riders report seamless integration with factory cab and weatherproof doors.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the breakaway hinge feature work for off-road use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The breakaway hinge system adds extra protection during narrow trail riding or rough terrain. If your mirror hits a tree branch or post, it will fold inward to reduce damage and prevent breakage. After folding, the mirror can be returned to its original position with light pressure. This design makes it safer for off-road use and helps extend the life of the mirror in challenging conditions. The system is especially helpful for riders who navigate wooded trails or tight spaces.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What are the benefits of the shatterproof glass used in these mirrors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The shatterproof tempered glass is designed to resist cracking and breaking on impact. It increases user safety and makes cleaning simple, even in tough, muddy conditions. The wide, clear reflection lets you see more behind your RZR, helping you spot obstacles or riders. This improves both your safety and the safety of others when riding off road. Tempered glass is more durable than standard glass and is less likely to splinter if struck.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nTake the next step in safety, style, and performance for your RZR with KIWI MASTER Side Mirrors. For more product options, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003evisit our Automotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more about Polaris vehicles and upgrades at the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Polaris_Inc.\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003ePolaris Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\nKeywords: KIWI, MASTER, Side, Mirrors\n\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kiwi Master","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47050721886443,"sku":"LPNO348725640","price":70.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71TwEutvphL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762825346"},{"product_id":"motoceo-stator-mercury-mariner-16amp-7045","title":"MOTOCEO Stator for Mercury Mariner Outboard 16Amp 1987-1999 2-Stroke Engines","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eMOTOCEO Stator arrives brand new, all parts sealed in factory packaging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MOTOCEO Stator is a premium replacement for outboard engines. It fits Mercury Mariner models from 30HP to 125HP, covering years 1987 to 1999. This reliable 16-amp stator is built for 2-stroke engines with 2, 3, or 4 cylinders. With a strong design, it helps your engine stay powerful on every trip.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned for marine durability, the MOTOCEO Stator uses high-quality copper. The windings increase output but also last longer. Its clear plastic encapsulation guards the stator from tough conditions. Saltwater, corrosion, and vibration are kept out, so the stator delivers years of steady operation. Engine owners can count on its ruggedness for all-season boating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing the MOTOCEO Stator makes installation simple. The product is made for exact OEM fit, matching original geometry. Most Mercury Mariner owners can replace the stator with minimal tools and time. Plug-and-play style means less hassle during upgrades or repairs. You do not have to worry about complicated steps or modifying your engine parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompatibility is one of its strengths. This stator replaces several OEM parts, such as 398-818535A17 and 398-818535A18. It also covers common numbers like 398-9710A12 and 398-9873A9. Check your manual or old part for a number match. Its broad compatibility makes the MOTOCEO Stator a smart choice if you own older or newer 2-stroke Mercury Mariner engines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen replacing your stator, double-check your flywheel type. This part is only for flywheels without bolted magnets. Following this rule ensures safe and reliable engine running. The manufacturer also recommends using a voltage regulator. Do not use a rectifier alone, because this can create charging or ignition problems. For advanced installation info, visit the official \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Stator\"\u003eWikipedia Stator Guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConsistent performance depends on timely maintenance. Your stator controls your engine’s charge and spark. If it fails, symptoms may include hard starting, weak performance, or engine misfires. Replacing a faulty stator right away keeps your engine reliable on the water. MOTOCEO Stator is made to meet or pass all OEM tests for safety and output. When you need peace of mind, MOTOCEO offers a dependable solution for your boat's electrical system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MOTOCEO Stator is great for anyone restoring or keeping classic outboards. If your Mercury Mariner is losing power on the lake or won’t start, the stator could be the issue. Routine inspection each season can catch stator problems before you get stranded. Upgrade now for smoother starts and steady power at all speeds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMultiple applications make this part even more valuable. Use it in bass boats, fishing crafts, rescue skiffs, or offshore runabouts built with Mercury Mariner 2-stroke engines. The stator’s simple finish also looks factory-fresh under the hood, pleasing those who care about appearance as well as utility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the MOTOCEO Stator suitable for every Mercury Mariner outboard engine? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The MOTOCEO Stator is designed for most Mercury Mariner outboards between 30HP and 125HP made from 1987 to 1999. It covers 2-stroke and 2, 3, or 4-cylinder types. For best results, check your old stator’s part number in your owner's manual. Some engines outside this range or with different flywheels may need another stator. If you are unsure, ask your marine dealer or check online resources.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How hard is it to install the MOTOCEO Stator? Can I do it without professional help? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The MOTOCEO Stator is made for easy, direct replacement. Many boat owners with basic skills can handle the job using standard tools. Always disconnect the battery first for safety. However, if you are not familiar with marine electronics or wiring, hiring a professional gives you added peace of mind. Correct installation means better engine performance and avoids possible warranty issues. Detailed guides are available in repair manuals or on reputable boating forums.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What signs should I watch for to know when my stator needs to be replaced? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Pay attention to symptoms such as trouble starting, a weak spark, poor idling, or loss of power at speed. If your engine stalls after warming up or struggles with battery charging, the stator could be failing. Sometimes, a burned smell or visible damage on the old stator means an urgent replacement is needed. Routine checks during tune-ups help spot problems before they affect your trips. Replacing a damaged stator early can save on costly engine repairs down the line.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGet more from your boat and keep your motor running at peak. The MOTOCEO Stator gives you quality, compatibility, and confidence for every outing. Ready to upgrade? Trust this stator to deliver excellent value for Mercury Mariner engines year after year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor further details on outboard engines and marine stator operation, explore expert sources such as the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Stator\"\u003eWikipedia Stator Guide\u003c\/a\u003e. Or, shop more electrical and ignition solutions in our \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\"\u003eAutomotive Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: MOTOCEO, Stator, Mercury, Mariner\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"MOTOCEO","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47051029676267,"sku":"LPNO351956942","price":85.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/51pthdtSxTS._AC_SL1000.jpg?v=1762836648"},{"product_id":"slingbox-m2-c42f","title":"Slingbox M2 - Stream Your Home TV Anywhere","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eBrand New, Never Opened Or Used\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Slingbox M2 lets you stream your home TV anywhere. Watch live or recorded shows on your devices. There are no monthly fees to worry about.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Slingbox M2 is a \u003cstrong\u003estreaming\u003c\/strong\u003e device that brings your TV viewing to a new level. Connect your Slingbox M2 to a cable or satellite box. You can then watch and control your home TV from anywhere in the world. Missed a show? Just open your app to catch it live or recorded. This device fits your busy life, making sure entertainment is always within reach.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSetup is made easy. Connect the Slingbox M2 with a component or composite video cable to your TV box. It works with both Wi-Fi and Ethernet for your convenience. The dual connectivity helps guarantee a solid, high-quality \u003cstrong\u003eTV\u003c\/strong\u003e stream. Enjoy video in HD, up to 1080p resolution. Videos look bright and detailed on any screen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e is another key advantage. The Slingbox M2 supports iOS, Android, Windows, and Kindle devices. Download the free Slingplayer app to access your content from almost any phone or computer. Forgot your tablet at home? Use your laptop or phone instead. This flexibility is a major benefit for people who use multiple devices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAnother highlight is cost savings. The Slingbox M2 only requires a one-time purchase. Unlike other streaming services, there are no ongoing monthly costs. Cut your subscription bills while keeping all of your favorite channels and recordings. The device brings long-term value to any household.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Slingbox M2 works with streaming devices like Apple TV and Chromecast. It also works with Roku and Fire TV. Cast your shows to a second TV with ease. Whether you want to stream in the living room or a hotel, it keeps entertainment close by.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis device is popular with frequent travelers and sports fans. Watch live games from anywhere, even if you are abroad. Access local news when you are far from home. College students love the Slingbox M2 too. Watch family TV from your dorm room. Everyone enjoys more control over what they watch, no matter where they are located.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUser privacy is important. Only you control access to your TV feed. The Slingbox M2 does not record or store your data. Your personal recordings and live shows stay private, just as they should.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is durable and long-lasting. The Slingbox M2 comes with all necessary cables. Easy-to-follow instructions mean you can set it up in minutes. Customer support is available if you need help during setup or use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the Slingbox M2 connect to my home network?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Slingbox M2 offers both Wi-Fi and Ethernet connections for your network. You can choose a wired setup for stability or connect over Wi-Fi for flexibility. Both connections are easy to set up and result in a smooth, continuous stream. If your wireless signal is weak, choose Ethernet for the best quality.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the Slingplayer app free to download and use?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Slingplayer app is completely free. It is available for iOS, Android, Windows, and Kindle. You can install the app on multiple devices. You do not need to pay any hidden fees or subscriptions. This makes it simple and cost-effective to enjoy your content wherever you go.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I watch my DVR recordings using the Slingbox M2?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, you can watch your DVR recordings with the Slingbox M2. You can even control playback remotely. This includes pausing, rewinding, or fast-forwarding. You do not need to be at home to enjoy all your saved programs. Manage your viewing from the road with ease.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What streaming devices and TV boxes work with the Slingbox M2?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Slingbox M2 is compatible with major devices. This includes Apple TV, Roku, and Chromecast. Fire TV is supported as well. It will work with most cable and satellite boxes. Popular brands like Comcast and DirecTV are included.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the Slingbox M2 require ongoing fees after purchase?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e No, there are no ongoing monthly fees for the Slingbox M2. You only pay once. All app features and device capabilities remain open to you at no extra charge. This sets it apart from other streaming solutions that require regular payments.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How does the Slingbox M2 connect to my home network?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Slingbox M2 offers both Wi-Fi and Ethernet connections for your network. You can choose a wired setup for stability or connect over Wi-Fi for flexibility. Both connections are easy to set up and result in a smooth, continuous stream. If your wireless signal is weak, choose Ethernet for the best quality.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is the Slingplayer app free to download and use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Slingplayer app is completely free. It is available for iOS, Android, Windows, and Kindle. You can install the app on multiple devices. You do not need to pay any hidden fees or subscriptions. This makes it simple and cost-effective to enjoy your content wherever you go.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I watch my DVR recordings using the Slingbox M2?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, you can watch your DVR recordings with the Slingbox M2. You can even control playback remotely. This includes pausing, rewinding, or fast-forwarding. You do not need to be at home to enjoy all your saved programs. Manage your viewing from the road with ease.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What streaming devices and TV boxes work with the Slingbox M2?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Slingbox M2 is compatible with major devices. This includes Apple TV, Roku, and Chromecast. Fire TV is supported as well. It will work with most cable and satellite boxes. Popular brands like Comcast and DirecTV are included.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does the Slingbox M2 require ongoing fees after purchase?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No, there are no ongoing monthly fees for the Slingbox M2. You only pay once. All app features and device capabilities remain open to you at no extra charge. This sets it apart from other streaming solutions that require regular payments.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Slingbox M2 is one of the most reliable solutions for remote \u003cstrong\u003estreaming\u003c\/strong\u003e. Whether you travel often, want to keep up with live sports, or just need more \u003cstrong\u003eTV\u003c\/strong\u003e flexibility, this device meets your needs. It is simple, effective, and designed for everyone. Explore more options for your home entertainment in our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eElectronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. For detailed reviews and updates, visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Slingbox\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eofficial Wikipedia page\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Slingbox, streaming, TV, remote\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Sling Media","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47055507587307,"sku":"LPNO305222264","price":52.74,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/7189v1b6zRL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762922830"},{"product_id":"wireless-carplay-adapter-ef7a","title":"Wireless CarPlay Adapter with Netflix \u0026 YouTube Support – Plug \u0026 Play USB Dongle for Android Auto \u0026 iPhone iOS 10+","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eTested, Device Turns On When Connected To Energy, Like New\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your driving experience with our Wireless CarPlay Adapter, designed to seamlessly integrate with your vehicle's existing system. This plug-and-play USB dongle transforms your wired CarPlay into a wireless hub, supporting popular streaming apps like Netflix and YouTube, and is compatible with Android Auto and iPhones running iOS 10 or later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur adapter offers effortless wireless connectivity, eliminating the need for cumbersome cables. Once installed, your device connects automatically, providing a truly hands-free experience. Enjoy seamless access to navigation, music, calls, and more without the hassle of plugging in your phone each time you enter your car.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith broad compatibility, this adapter supports iPhone models from the iPhone 6 onwards and is compatible with over 500 car models, including popular brands like Ford, Toyota, Chevrolet, Honda, and Hyundai. Please ensure your vehicle has a factory-installed wired CarPlay system, as this adapter is designed to upgrade existing wired setups to wireless functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe plug-and-play design ensures a quick and stable connection with minimal setup. Simply plug the adapter into your car's USB port, and it establishes a reliable connection swiftly, allowing you to use navigation, music, calls, Siri, and other functions without any lag.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFeaturing a compact and durable design, the adapter is no larger than your car key. Crafted with a sleek black mirror-finished surface and silver ABS material, it adds a modern touch to your vehicle's interior while being lightweight and robust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur adapter retains all original car control methods, including touch screen, knob, and steering wheel button controls. This ensures a seamless transition to wireless functionality without compromising the controls you're accustomed to.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEquipped with a high-performance chip, the adapter ensures a stable connection and efficient data processing. This results in a smooth and responsive user experience, free from interruptions or delays.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe foldable nylon cable is both flexible and sturdy, allowing for easy placement and reducing clutter in your vehicle. Its design ensures durability and longevity, even with regular use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe are committed to continuous improvement, offering firmware updates to enhance the adapter's performance and introduce new features. Staying updated ensures your adapter works seamlessly with new iPhone software updates and continues to perform at its best.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur dedicated customer service team provides 24-hour technical support for troubleshooting and assistance. Should you encounter any difficulties, you can reach out to our team for timely and helpful responses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I know if my car model is compatible? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Our Wireless CarPlay Adapter is compatible with over 500 car models equipped with factory-installed wired CarPlay systems. To confirm compatibility, check your vehicle's manual or consult with your car manufacturer. Additionally, you can test by connecting your iPhone to your car's USB port; if the CarPlay logo appears on your car's display, your vehicle supports wired CarPlay and is compatible with our adapter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will this adapter work with my Android phone? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, our adapter supports both Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. For Android devices, ensure your smartphone supports the latest Android Auto function and is running Android 11 or higher. This compatibility allows users with different smartphone operating systems to enjoy wireless connectivity in their vehicles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use streaming apps like Netflix and YouTube with this adapter? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, our adapter supports popular streaming services like Netflix and YouTube, enabling you to enjoy your favorite shows and movies while parked or during breaks. This functionality is particularly useful for long waits or road trips, transforming your car into a mobile entertainment hub.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How do I set up the adapter for the first time? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Setting up the adapter is straightforward. Start your car and wait for the head unit system to load. Connect the adapter to your car's USB port designated for wired CarPlay or Android Auto. On your smartphone, enable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, and pair with the adapter's Bluetooth signal. Once paired, your device will automatically connect to the adapter's Wi-Fi, and you're ready to enjoy wireless CarPlay or Android Auto.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What should I do if the adapter doesn't connect automatically? \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e If the adapter doesn't connect automatically, ensure that your smartphone's Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are turned on and not paired with other devices. Clear any previous pairing history, restart your phone, and attempt to pair again. If issues persist, consider updating the adapter's firmware or contacting our technical support for assistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnhance your driving experience with our Wireless CarPlay Adapter, offering seamless wireless connectivity, broad compatibility, and support for popular streaming apps. Its plug-and-play design, compact and durable build, and retention of original car controls make it an essential addition to your vehicle. With continuous firmware updates and dedicated customer support, you can trust in the adapter's performance and reliability. Upgrade your car's infotainment system today and enjoy a more connected and entertaining drive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information on compatible car models and setup instructions, please refer to the user manual or contact our customer support team.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/electronics\"\u003eExplore our electronics Collection\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor further reading on wireless CarPlay adapters and their benefits, you may find this article helpful: \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/smartergoods.com\/2024-car-play-wireless-adapter-review\/\"\u003e2024 Car Play Wireless Adapter Review – Live Smarter\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Wireless, CarPlay, Adapter, USB\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Crazygol","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47055531639019,"sku":"LPNO350236299","price":78.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/710mefd8GWL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762925026"},{"product_id":"parod-513296-wheel-hub-assembly-9169","title":"PAROD Pair 513296 Front Wheel Hub and Bearing Assembly for Nissan and Infiniti Vehicles","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eAppears brand new. No signs of use. Includes a pair for optimal value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PAROD Pair 513296 Front Wheel Hub and Bearing Assembly delivers strong reliability and lasting performance for your Nissan or Infiniti. This assembly fits select models, including the Nissan Altima and Infiniti Q50. Restore your front wheels' smooth operation and ensure safety with this precise fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003ewheel\u003c\/strong\u003e hub and \u003cstrong\u003ebearing\u003c\/strong\u003e assembly is engineered with high-quality, durable materials. It features a robust 5-lug design. The integrated ABS sensor offers direct communication with your braking system. This setup helps to maintain optimal brake performance at all times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pre-greased and sealed unit prevents contaminants from entering. You do not need additional lubrication. This protection reduces maintenance demands and keeps the assembly reliable for longer. Its construction helps reduce the risks of dirt, water, and dust, helping maximize part life in all driving conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKey specifications provide clear compatibility. It has a flange diameter of 136.0 mm and a bolt circle of 114.3 mm. The flange offset is 40.7 mm. These dimensions help make installation simple. Most basic tools are sufficient, with no complex steps or special devices required. Even DIYers can install this unit with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis hub assembly is compatible with various models. For Nissan, it fits Altima (2013-2018) and many Maxima generations. Several Infiniti sedans, such as Q50, are also included. Please check your own vehicle’s year and model to confirm. Not sure? Reference the product documentation or contact us for help.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTimely replacement of a faulty wheel hub and bearing is critical. Failing parts may cause loud noises, shaky wheels, and poor steering. If you notice humming, clicking, or a loose wheel, your assembly may have worn out. Installing this PAROD replacement helps restore stability, safer handling, and a quiet ride.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis unit meets or exceeds OEM factory standards. The quality and accuracy deliver peace of mind and long-term driving satisfaction. Drivers can trust the strong construction and reliable \u003cstrong\u003eassembly\u003c\/strong\u003e throughout every mile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFurther, an integrated ABS sensor boosts your braking safety. It transmits precise data to your vehicle’s ABS system. This addition helps ensure proper braking and shortens stopping distances. It is particularly important in rain or on icy roads, where fast reaction matters most.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdvantages of the PAROD 513296 assembly:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-lubricated for convenience and lasting performance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCorrosion-resistant finish keeps harmful elements out.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrecision fit. No modification needed for specified vehicles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBacked by rigorous testing to ensure safety on the road.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing PAROD means you get a dependable fix with every purchase. Our kits deliver restored smoothness, longer part lifespan, and renewed peace of mind on any journey. Every step of the driving experience improves with fresh, properly functioning front wheel hubs and bearings installed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor even more auto parts to complete your maintenance project, \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/automotive\"\u003eexplore our full automotive collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Our selection covers everything from gears to wheel accessories and more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Will the PAROD 513296 fit my 2015 Nissan Altima?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This assembly is designed for 2013-2018 Nissan Altima models. It offers exact sizing, plug-and-play installation, and is guaranteed to fit those generations. For other Nissan years, always confirm compatibility with our team or vehicle guide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is additional grease or any sealing needed before installation?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e There is no need for extra grease or special sealing. Every PAROD assembly comes fully pre-lubricated and tightly sealed by the manufacturer. This helps prevent wear, keeps out grit, and ensures you have trouble-free service right from your first drive.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What are the signs of a worn wheel hub and bearing?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e You may hear grinding, humming, or rumbling from the wheels. The steering may feel less responsive, or you might notice vibration or looseness in the wheel itself. Acting promptly on these symptoms is wise, as continuing to drive could affect braking or even cause wheel detachment in extreme cases. Always inspect if these symptoms appear, and swap the assembly if necessary for safety.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the integrated ABS sensor benefit daily driving?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The ABS sensor in this hub allows your braking system to receive real-time wheel speed data. This improves traction control and prevents skidding, especially in wet or slippery conditions. It ensures smoother stops and higher safety for you and others on the road. Correct ABS functionality also helps your vehicle pass inspections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want to read more about how a \u003cstrong\u003ewheel\u003c\/strong\u003e hub and \u003cstrong\u003ebearing\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eassembly\u003c\/strong\u003e works, visit this detailed resource at \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Wheel_hub_assembly\"\u003eWikipedia: Wheel Hub Assembly\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: wheel, hub, bearing, assembly\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"PAROD","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47055544254699,"sku":"LPNO395071022","price":65.54,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/714aOlWpOmS._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1762925677"},{"product_id":"lenoya-18v-5ah-battery-charger-c0fc","title":"Lenoya 18V 6.5Ah Replacement for Milwaukee M-18 Battery 2-Pack with Charger","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003eGrade A. This item is brand new and ready for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLenoya 18V 6.5Ah Replacement Battery 2-Pack with Charger is the perfect choice for Milwaukee M-18 tools. You get high capacity and proven durability with each charge. Enjoy reliable power for your projects. Stay productive longer with fewer interruptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePower is what sets this kit apart. Each battery provides a huge 6.5Ah capacity, far more than standard batteries. This lets you work longer before you need to recharge. Lithium-ion cells keep the energy flow steady, giving you consistent power over the entire charge. That means your tool's performance will not dip unexpectedly. You can drill, cut, or grind smoothly through every task.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis replacement battery set is made for convenience. The 18V Lenoya batteries work with all Milwaukee M-18 cordless tools. That includes popular models like drills and impact drivers. It also covers saws, grinders, and more. You will only need one battery type. Your gear will stay organized, and you can swap batteries between different tools quickly. This is great for both busy job sites and home projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCharging is safe and fast. The included charger comes with a multi-voltage design. It automatically detects different battery sizes. The built-in smart system checks each battery for overheating. It will stop charging if needed, preventing damage and extending battery life. LED lights keep you updated. You always know when charging is done. This means less waiting and more working time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDurability is a focus of the Lenoya design. Each battery pack features a tough outer shell. It resists drops, impacts, and dust. If you use your tools on rough job sites, this is a plus. Both batteries can handle extreme temperatures. They will perform in the heat of summer or the chill of winter. Professionals and home users alike will find these reliable year after year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis set is cost-effective. Buying two batteries with a single charger saves money and prevents delays. If one battery runs down, you swap it and keep going. You are not held up by one battery being low on charge. Over time, this efficiency leads to savings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhy choose Lenoya? You get peace of mind with a product that meets high standards. Every aspect, from energy output to housing material, was created for strength and quality. Your tools will always have a steady supply of power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis bundle is not just about batteries. It is about making your work smoother and faster. Busy contractors and hobbyists both benefit. You get to focus on your project, not your equipment's power. If you value time and performance, this package is a smart investment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these batteries compatible with all Milwaukee M-18 tools?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatibility is built in. The Lenoya 18V 6.5Ah Replacement Batteries are made for Milwaukee M-18 cordless systems. You can use them with your M-18 drills and also with your Milwaukee saws. This covers models for both homeowners and contractors. The design ensures that you do not need other brands or extra adaptors. If you use Milwaukee tools featuring the M-18 system, these batteries will fit well and deliver reliable current for your tasks.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How long does it take to fully charge these batteries?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Charging time depends on a few things. What was the battery’s previous charge? Is the environment very hot or cold? The included Lenoya charger is made to work fast and safe. It can fully charge the 6.5Ah battery in around 1.5 to 3 hours under typical conditions. LED indicators show you the current level at all times, so you will know exactly when to swap batteries and get back to work. Plan ahead and you will never be caught with a dead battery.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do these batteries have a warranty?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, Lenoya provides a helpful warranty for these replacement batteries. This warranty covers issues with manufacturing or unexpected battery defects. If you run into a problem, help is just a call or email away. Always keep your purchase documentation handy. The warranty policy details the exact length of coverage and what is included. For the latest information, see the product paperwork or contact Lenoya directly for answers.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I use the charger for other battery types?\u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The included charger is made for Lenoya’s 18V lithium-ion batteries, as well as many batteries in the Milwaukee M-18 range. It is not designed for use with non-lithium or much higher voltage units. Always check your battery specs before charging to avoid damage. If you wish to use it with other types, check for compatibility, or stick to the brands recommended by Lenoya.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these batteries compatible with all Milwaukee M-18 tools?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Compatibility is built in. The Lenoya 18V 6.5Ah Replacement Batteries are made for Milwaukee M-18 cordless systems. You can use them with your M-18 drills and also with your Milwaukee saws. This covers models for both homeowners and contractors. The design ensures that you do not need other brands or extra adaptors. If you use Milwaukee tools featuring the M-18 system, these batteries will fit well and deliver reliable current for your tasks.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How long does it take to fully charge these batteries?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Charging time depends on a few things. What was the battery’s previous charge? Is the environment very hot or cold? The included Lenoya charger is made to work fast and safe. It can fully charge the 6.5Ah battery in around 1.5 to 3 hours under typical conditions. LED indicators show you the current level at all times, so you will know exactly when to swap batteries and get back to work. Plan ahead and you will never be caught with a dead battery.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Do these batteries have a warranty?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, Lenoya provides a helpful warranty for these replacement batteries. This warranty covers issues with manufacturing or unexpected battery defects. If you run into a problem, help is just a call or email away. Always keep your purchase documentation handy. The warranty policy details the exact length of coverage and what is included. For the latest information, see the product paperwork or contact Lenoya directly for answers.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use the charger for other battery types?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The included charger is made for Lenoya’s 18V lithium-ion batteries, as well as many batteries in the Milwaukee M-18 range. It is not designed for use with non-lithium or much higher voltage units. Always check your battery specs before charging to avoid damage. If you wish to use it with other types, check for compatibility, or stick to the brands recommended by Lenoya.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for more compatible tools and power solutions? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/tools\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eBrowse our tools collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want to learn more about lithium-ion technology, visit \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Lithium-ion_battery\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eWikipedia's Lithium-ion battery page\u003c\/a\u003e for useful information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Lenoya 18V 6.5Ah Replacement Battery 2-Pack with Charger keeps your Milwaukee M-18 tools running their best. Enjoy strong performance, steady power, and long battery life. Upgrade now and make your work easier, faster, and more reliable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Lenoya, 18V, 6.5Ah, Replacement\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lenoya","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47068448424171,"sku":"LPNO380172364","price":51.55,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71qTR5ihK2L._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1763354522"},{"product_id":"meross-wifi-water-timer-7408","title":"meross WiFi Water Hose Timer – Smart Sprinkler Control with Brass Inlet \u0026 Outlet","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eLike New, No Sign Of Damage\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your outdoor watering. The \u003cstrong\u003emeross WiFi Water Hose Timer\u003c\/strong\u003e brings brass reliability and smart control for any home. Enjoy easy setup, automation, and compatibility with top smart home platforms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe meross WiFi Water Hose Timer lets you manage watering from anywhere. WiFi connection makes scheduling easy. Control your system from your phone, whether you’re at home or away. This timer connects seamlessly to Apple HomeKit, Amazon Alexa, and Google Assistant. You get reliable voice commands and cellular access in seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDurable brass makes this timer tough and weatherproof. Both the inlet and outlet are brass, resisting rust and corrosion. This rugged design survives summer sun, heavy rain, and freezing winter. Gardeners, homeowners, and even landscapers will appreciate years of steady performance. No more cracked plastic or leaky thread issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Meross app provides complete control. Set custom watering times for each day or week. Adjust durations from 1 minute to nearly 12 hours to match any plant’s needs. Use daily, weekly, or even odd\/even day schedules. Reduce water waste and prevent overwatering. Help your garden, lawn, and flower beds thrive regardless of the season.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy peace of mind with Smart Weather Skip. The timer checks live, local weather data before each cycle. It skips if rain is expected, happening, or just ended. Watering also pauses in freezing or high winds. This means less wasted water, lower bills, and healthier plants. Even if you forget, your timer does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmart home integration is simple. Connect to Apple HomeKit, Alexa, or Google Assistant in minutes. Use voice controls to start, stop, or adjust schedules. Built-in app alerts warn of low battery or odd water flow. Check usage logs to see how much water each area uses. These features help busy families and eco-friendly gardeners alike.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe manual mode is straightforward. Press a single button for instant water. The timer defaults to 15 minutes for safety, but you can set your own limit. This avoids waste or flooding if you step away. Great for washing pets, filling a pool, or other quick jobs. Even children and older adults can use it safely and easily.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the meross timer anywhere outdoors. It’s ideal for gardens, lawns, vegetable beds, and decorative borders. Install the timer with your hose, sprinkler, or drip line. Water flower beds and even fill up play pools for kids and pets. The versatility suits almost any outdoor setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eManage several zones with one hub. The Meross MSH400 hub links up to 24 timers at once. Control different areas of your property through the app. Organize schedules for a backyard, front lawn, side garden, or greenhouse. Expand as you add more hoses or zones, without extra wires.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWiFi setup is smooth. The timer uses the 2.4GHz band for strong coverage outdoors. Make sure your network supports 2.4GHz for best results. The Meross hub is available separately or in bundle kits. Pairing takes just minutes, even for large yards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnjoy extra features and reliable help. The timer is water resistant and built for outdoor life, with an IP rating suitable for year-round use. The app’s dashboard makes monitoring and adjusting schedules clear and simple.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is great for busy schedules, travel, or anyone who wants a healthy lawn with less effort. Track your savings, reduce runoff, and ensure your landscape stays green. Many customers praise the timer’s ease of use and build quality, especially compared to traditional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor full details, specs, and technical support, visit the \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/www.meross.com\/product?type=water-timer\" target=\"_blank\"\u003emeross official product page\u003c\/a\u003e. Get user guides, FAQs, and the latest product updates there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWant more smart home control? \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/personal-care\"\u003eExplore our personal-care Collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more solutions you can trust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can the meross WiFi Water Hose Timer operate without a WiFi hub?\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The timer will only work with a compatible WiFi hub. The Meross MSH400 provides the connection to your network. Without a hub, you lose all smart features, remote control, and app support. The hub makes it easy to run several timers in different parts of your yard. Installation is fast, and the app will walk you through every step. It’s very useful for large properties or complex gardening systems.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is the meross WiFi Water Hose Timer compatible with 5GHz WiFi networks?\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The timer only connects to 2.4GHz WiFi bands. The lower frequency provides greater range, making it ideal for outdoor use. Some routers combine 2.4GHz and 5GHz signals, so you may need to separate them for setup. The 2.4GHz band travels through walls and across yards better. Always check your router’s specifications before installation to avoid signal issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How does the Smart Weather Skip feature work?\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Smart Weather Skip checks reliable, real-time weather data for your local area before activating the timer. If it detects rain on its way, currently falling, or just ended, watering won’t start. The same skip happens during strong winds or below-freezing conditions. This saves water and protects your plants from overwatering or freeze damage. You don’t need to monitor the forecast yourself—the timer does it for you, giving you both convenience and efficiency.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can I control multiple timers with one WiFi hub?\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the Meross MSH400 hub supports up to 24 water timers. Schedule and customize each separately using one mobile device and one app. The system is designed for both home gardeners and professionals with many watering zones. Moving, adjusting, or expanding your setup later is easy. One hub is all you need, so it saves money and reduces clutter in your home.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the timer support Apple HomeKit automation?\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The timer pairs well with Apple HomeKit. You can use basic voice controls and access the timer in the Home app. However, more advanced routines like Siri Shortcuts for custom scenes are not enabled yet. You can turn the watering on or off by voice command. For typical users, this covers most needs. HomeKit support ensures simple integration with other Apple smart home devices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emeross WiFi Water Hose Timer\u003c\/strong\u003e gives you reliable, smart, and eco-friendly control. Save water, money, and effort, while enjoying healthier outdoor spaces. The timer is built to last, easy to operate, and a perfect fit for modern homes and gardens year-round.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: meross, WiFi, Water, Timer\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\n\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n\"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n\"mainEntity\": [\n{\n\"@type\": \"Question\",\n\"name\": \"Can the meross WiFi Water Hose Timer operate without a WiFi hub?\",\n\"acceptedAnswer\": {\n\"@type\": \"Answer\",\n\"text\": \"The timer will only work with a compatible WiFi hub. The Meross MSH400 provides the connection to your network. Without a hub, you lose all smart features, remote control, and app support. The hub makes it easy to run several timers in different parts of your yard. Installation is fast, and the app will walk you through every step. It’s very useful for large properties or complex gardening systems.\"\n}\n},\n{\n\"@type\": \"Question\",\n\"name\": \"Is the meross WiFi Water Hose Timer compatible with 5GHz WiFi networks?\",\n\"acceptedAnswer\": {\n\"@type\": \"Answer\",\n\"text\": \"The timer only connects to 2.4GHz WiFi bands. The lower frequency provides greater range, making it ideal for outdoor use. Some routers combine 2.4GHz and 5GHz signals, so you may need to separate them for setup. The 2.4GHz band travels through walls and across yards better. Always check your router’s specifications before installation to avoid signal issues.\"\n}\n},\n{\n\"@type\": \"Question\",\n\"name\": \"How does the Smart Weather Skip feature work?\",\n\"acceptedAnswer\": {\n\"@type\": \"Answer\",\n\"text\": \"The Smart Weather Skip checks reliable, real-time weather data for your local area before activating the timer. If it detects rain on its way, currently falling, or just ended, watering won’t start. The same skip happens during strong winds or below-freezing conditions. This saves water and protects your plants from overwatering or freeze damage. You don’t need to monitor the forecast yourself—the timer does it for you, giving you both convenience and efficiency.\"\n}\n},\n{\n\"@type\": \"Question\",\n\"name\": \"Can I control multiple timers with one WiFi hub?\",\n\"acceptedAnswer\": {\n\"@type\": \"Answer\",\n\"text\": \"Yes, the Meross MSH400 hub supports up to 24 water timers. Schedule and customize each separately using one mobile device and one app. The system is designed for both home gardeners and professionals with many watering zones. Moving, adjusting, or expanding your setup later is easy. One hub is all you need, so it saves money and reduces clutter in your home.\"\n}\n},\n{\n\"@type\": \"Question\",\n\"name\": \"Does the timer support Apple HomeKit automation?\",\n\"acceptedAnswer\": {\n\"@type\": \"Answer\",\n\"text\": \"The timer pairs well with Apple HomeKit. You can use basic voice controls and access the timer in the Home app. However, more advanced routines like Siri Shortcuts for custom scenes are not enabled yet. You can turn the watering on or off by voice command. For typical users, this covers most needs. HomeKit support ensures simple integration with other Apple smart home devices.\"\n}\n}\n]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Meross","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47068541026539,"sku":"LPNO381288043","price":58.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/61y8l4BYfLL._AC_SL1500.jpg?v=1763362853"},{"product_id":"ac-compressor-nissan-2012-2019-49be","title":"New AC Air Condition Compressor with Clutch for Nissan 1.6L Models (2012-2019)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e New\u003cbr\u003ePremium compressor for Nissan 1.6L 2012-2019. Delivers reliable and efficient cooling all year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpgrade your vehicle’s comfort with this high-quality AC compressor. Made for Nissan 1.6L models from 2012 to 2019, it helps keep your car cool in heat. Enjoy quick, powerful air conditioning with this essential part.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis AC compressor is built strong. Aluminum alloy construction means it lasts long and resists wear. It stays quiet and reduces vibrations, bringing a smoother ride. Each unit comes pre-filled with 120ml PAG 46 oil. This factory fill cuts down on maintenance. No need to add oil right after buying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFitment covers several Nissan models for versatility. Compatible with these options: 2014-2019 Nissan Versa Note, Nissan March, and Nissan Note 1.6L. Also fits 2012-2019 Nissan Versa 1.6L, 2015-2019 Nissan Micra 1.6L. Plus, 2016-2018 Nissan Tiida 1.6L and 1.8L. Suitable for daily drivers and those needing a strong replacement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEasy and worry-free installation is possible, as it matches OEM specifications for precision. Still, having a certified technician install it is best. This protects your warranty and ensures top performance. Always clean the AC system before fitment. Removing dirt and debris keeps your new compressor running longer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis AC compressor is about more than cold air. It also keeps your engine running efficiently. A working AC system puts less stress on the engine. This can help improve fuel economy and reduce your costs over time. You get consistent cooling and better mileage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen replacing the compressor, you invest in your Nissan’s long-term health. This means less risk of sudden AC failure on hot days. Drivers and passengers stay comfortable and alert. High cabin comfort can boost driver focus and overall safety.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy choose our AC compressor?\u003c\/strong\u003e You get robust materials, simple fitment, and peace of mind. Stay cool and protect your car’s engine. For more about Nissan automotive parts, visit the official \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Automobile_air_conditioner\"\u003eWikipedia page on automotive air conditioning\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Is this AC compressor compatible with my 2013 Nissan Versa 1.6L?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e This AC compressor fits all Nissan Versa 1.6L models from 2012 to 2019, including yours. The fit has been tested on many model years. Always check your vehicle’s engine code and part number if unsure. Have your mechanic confirm compatibility for complete peace of mind.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Does the compressor come with the necessary oil pre-filled?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Each AC compressor arrives pre-filled with 120ml of PAG 46 oil. This oil offers proper lubrication for the internal parts. You do not need to add oil before installation. Always flush your AC system before replacing the unit to keep clean oil running in your vehicle.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Should I have a professional install this compressor?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Installation matches OEM fittings for a straightforward setup. Still, we recommend using a trained technician to avoid installation errors. This ensures your warranty stays valid and the compressor works its best. Professionals use specialty tools and leak testing for a safe, complete job.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How can this compressor improve my car’s airflow and safety?\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintaining a fresh compressor restores strong airflow inside your vehicle. This keeps everyone inside cool and alert during long trips. With less strain on your engine, you get better driving performance and can save on fuel. Reliable air conditioning supports safety by lowering fatigue behind the wheel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a wide selection of \u003ca style=\"color: #0066cc; text-decoration: underline;\" href=\"\/collections\/automotive\"\u003eautomotive\u003c\/a\u003e cooling solutions, browse our curated collection. Experience the reliability of genuine AC components for Nissan. Optimize your \u003cstrong\u003ecompressor\u003c\/strong\u003e performance. Drive the difference with \u003cstrong\u003eautomotive\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003ecooling\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003eNissan\u003c\/strong\u003e quality. \u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompressor\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eautomotive\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003ecooling\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eNissan\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Ilonpa","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47085191102699,"sku":"LPNO392192006","price":94.04,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/71ZyWNThsZL._SL1500.jpg?v=1763514976"},{"product_id":"hudson-barbara-jeans-black-31-3045","title":"Hudson Jeans Women's Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean, Black, Size 31","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Like New\u003cbr\u003eLike New, Tags Still Intact\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Hudson Jeans Women's Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean in Black, Size 31, offers a sleek and flattering fit for any wardrobe. These jeans feature a high-rise waist and super skinny leg, providing a modern silhouette that complements various body types. Crafted from a premium blend of 57% cotton, 37% modal, 4% elastomultiester, and 2% elastane, they offer both comfort and durability. The fabric's super stretch design ensures the jeans maintain their shape even after extended wear, making them a reliable choice for daily use. The classic five-pocket styling and zipper fly with button closure add to their timeless appeal. With an inseam of approximately 30 inches, a front rise of 10 inches, and a leg opening of about 10 inches, these jeans are designed to fit true to size. The black color adds versatility, allowing them to be paired effortlessly with various tops and footwear for both casual and formal occasions. Whether you're dressing up for a night out or opting for a relaxed daytime look, the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean is a versatile addition to your denim collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese jeans are designed with a high-rise waist, which sits comfortably above the hips, providing a secure and flattering fit. The super skinny leg design hugs the body closely, accentuating the natural curves and creating a streamlined appearance. The combination of cotton and modal in the fabric blend offers a soft feel against the skin, while the inclusion of elastomultiester and elastane provides the necessary stretch for ease of movement. This blend ensures that the jeans are both comfortable and resilient, capable of withstanding regular wear without losing their shape. The classic five-pocket design includes two front pockets, two back pockets, and a small coin pocket, offering practical storage options. The zipper fly with button closure ensures a secure fit, while the belt loops allow for the addition of a belt to customize the fit further. The black color is achieved through a careful dyeing process, resulting in a deep, rich hue that resists fading over time. This makes the jeans a reliable choice for those seeking a durable and stylish denim option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen it comes to styling, the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean offers endless possibilities. For a casual look, pair them with a simple t-shirt and sneakers. To dress them up, opt for a blouse and heels. The high-rise waist makes them ideal for tucking in tops, creating a polished and put-together appearance. Layering with jackets or cardigans can add depth to the outfit, making it suitable for various seasons. Accessories such as statement necklaces or scarves can further enhance the look, allowing for personalization based on individual style preferences. The versatility of these jeans makes them a staple piece that can transition seamlessly from day to night, adapting to different occasions with ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaintaining the quality of the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean is straightforward. It is recommended to machine wash them cold with like colors to preserve the fabric's integrity and color vibrancy. Avoid using bleach, as it can weaken the fibers and cause discoloration. Tumble drying on low heat or hanging them to dry helps prevent shrinkage and maintains the jeans' shape. If ironing is necessary, do so on a medium setting and inside out to protect the fabric's surface. Following these care instructions will ensure that the jeans remain in excellent condition, providing long-lasting wear and maintaining their aesthetic appeal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn summary, the Hudson Jeans Women's Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean in Black, Size 31, combines style, comfort, and durability. The high-rise waist and super skinny leg design create a flattering silhouette, while the premium fabric blend offers softness and stretch for all-day comfort. The classic five-pocket styling and deep black color add to their timeless appeal, making them a versatile addition to any wardrobe. With proper care, these jeans will maintain their quality and appearance, serving as a reliable and stylish choice for various occasions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e What is the fabric composition of the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The jeans are made from a blend of 57% cotton, 37% modal, 4% elastomultiester, and 2% elastane. This combination provides a soft feel, durability, and the necessary stretch for comfort and movement.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e How should I care for these jeans to maintain their quality?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e To preserve the quality of the jeans, machine wash them cold with like colors. Avoid using bleach, and tumble dry on low heat or hang to dry. If ironing is needed, use a medium setting and iron inside out to protect the fabric.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do these jeans fit true to size?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean is designed to fit true to size. The high-rise waist and super skinny leg provide a snug and flattering fit. It's recommended to refer to the size chart for accurate measurements.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Can these jeans be dressed up for formal occasions?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e Absolutely. The sleek black color and super skinny design make these jeans suitable for dressing up. Pair them with a blouse and heels for a polished look, or add a blazer for a more formal ensemble.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eQuestion:\u003c\/strong\u003e Are these jeans suitable for all body types?\n    \u003cbr\u003e\n    \u003cstrong\u003eAnswer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The high-rise waist and super skinny leg are designed to flatter various body types by accentuating natural curves and providing a streamlined silhouette. The stretch fabric ensures comfort and adaptability to different shapes.\n  \u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the fabric composition of the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The jeans are made from a blend of 57% cotton, 37% modal, 4% elastomultiester, and 2% elastane. This combination provides a soft feel, durability, and the necessary stretch for comfort and movement.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How should I care for these jeans to maintain their quality?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"To preserve the quality of the jeans, machine wash them cold with like colors. Avoid using bleach, and tumble dry on low heat or hang to dry. If ironing is needed, use a medium setting and iron inside out to protect the fabric.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Do these jeans fit true to size?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes, the Hudson Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean is designed to fit true to size. The high-rise waist and super skinny leg provide a snug and flattering fit. It's recommended to refer to the size chart for accurate measurements.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can these jeans be dressed up for formal occasions?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely. The sleek black color and super skinny design make these jeans suitable for dressing up. Pair them with a blouse and heels for a polished look, or add a blazer for a more formal ensemble.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these jeans suitable for all body types?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The high-rise waist and super skinny leg are designed to flatter various body types by accentuating natural curves and providing a streamlined silhouette. The stretch fabric ensures comfort and adaptability to different shapes.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor more denim options, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/apparel\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eExplore our apparel Collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor additional information on denim care and styling tips, you may find this resource helpful: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.wikihow.com\/Wear-Skinny-Jeans\" style=\"color:#0066cc;text-decoration:underline;\"\u003eHow to Wear Skinny Jeans\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn conclusion, the Hudson Jeans Women's Barbara High Rise Super Skinny Jean in Black, Size 31, is a versatile and stylish addition to any wardrobe. Its high-rise waist and super skinny leg design create a flattering silhouette, while the premium fabric blend ensures comfort and durability. The classic five-pocket styling and deep black color add to its timeless appeal, making it suitable for various occasions. With proper care, these jeans will maintain their quality and appearance, serving as a reliable and fashionable choice for years to come.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKeywords: Hudson, Jeans, Women's, Barbara\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Hudson","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47085438042347,"sku":"LPNO321830640","price":85.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0707\/7003\/2875\/files\/5194lFovJOL._AC_SY550.jpg?v=1763528103"}],"url":"https:\/\/urbansupplyplus.com\/collections\/50-to-100.oembed?page=9","provider":"Urban Supply Plus","version":"1.0","type":"link"}